RTN 950A V100R008C10 RFU User Manual 01

OptiX 950A Radio Transmission System
V100R008C10
RFU User Manual
Issue 01
Date 2016-3-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
RFU User Manual Contents
Contents
1 System..............................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Components.................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 RF System Configuration............................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 RF Specifications............................................................................................................................................................7
1.3.1 Air Interface Capacity................................................................................................................................................. 8
1.3.2 EPLA Service Throughput.........................................................................................................................................11
1.3.3 RFU Performance...................................................................................................................................................... 13
1.3.4 BU Performance........................................................................................................................................................ 15
1.3.5 Receiver Sensitivity................................................................................................................................................... 16
2 Hardware....................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1 Chassis.......................................................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.1 Chassis Structure....................................................................................................................................................... 20
2.1.2 Installation Methods.................................................................................................................................................. 20
2.1.3 Air Duct..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.1.4 IDU Labels................................................................................................................................................................ 21
2.2 Board List..................................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.3 ISM6............................................................................................................................................................................. 31
2.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................................... 31
2.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................................................ 31
2.3.3 Functions and Features.............................................................................................................................................. 33
2.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................40
2.3.5 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................44
2.3.6 Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................................................47
2.3.7 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 48
2.4 RFU.............................................................................................................................................................................. 64
2.4.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 64
2.4.3 Working Principles.................................................................................................................................................... 66
2.4.4 Installation Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 67
2.4.5 Ports........................................................................................................................................................................... 68
2.4.6 Labels.........................................................................................................................................................................69
2.5 Branching Unit............................................................................................................................................................. 74
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

2.5.1 Appearance................................................................................................................................................................ 74
2.5.3 Working Principles.................................................................................................................................................... 77
2.5.4 Installation Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 78
2.5.5 Ports........................................................................................................................................................................... 80
2.5.6 Labels.........................................................................................................................................................................81
2.6 Antennas....................................................................................................................................................................... 85
2.6.1 Device Type............................................................................................................................................................... 85
2.6.2 Functions................................................................................................................................................................... 87
2.6.3 Working Principle...................................................................................................................................................... 87
2.6.4 Antenna Diameters.................................................................................................................................................... 88
2.7 Feeder........................................................................................................................................................................... 89
2.7.1 Elliptical Waveguide..................................................................................................................................................89
2.7.2 Flexible Waveguide................................................................................................................................................... 91
3 Features..........................................................................................................................................93
3.1 ODU and RFU.............................................................................................................................................................. 95
3.2 1+1 FD..........................................................................................................................................................................95
3.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................... 96
3.2.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................................... 97
3.2.2.1 System Configuration (Working with RFU)...........................................................................................................97
3.2.2.2 System Configuration(with ODU)..........................................................................................................................98
3.2.2.3 System Configuration (Working with RFU).........................................................................................................102
3.2.2.4 Protection Type.....................................................................................................................................................104
3.2.2.5 Switching Conditions........................................................................................................................................... 104
3.2.2.6 Switching Impact.................................................................................................................................................. 106
3.2.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 106
3.2.3.1 SDH Radio............................................................................................................................................................106
3.2.3.2 Integrated IP microwave.......................................................................................................................................109
3.2.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................113
3.2.5 Availability...............................................................................................................................................................114
3.2.6 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 114
3.2.7 Feature Dependencies and Limitations....................................................................................................................114
3.2.8 Planning Guidelines.................................................................................................................................................118
3.2.9 Relevant Alarms and Events....................................................................................................................................118
3.2.10 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 119
3.3 SD Combination......................................................................................................................................................... 119
3.3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 120
3.3.2 System Configuration.............................................................................................................................................. 120
3.3.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 122
3.3.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................123
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

3.3.5 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 123

3.3.6 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 123
3.3.9 Related Alarms and Events......................................................................................................................................124
3.3.10 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 125
3.4 XPIC........................................................................................................................................................................... 125
3.4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 125
3.4.2 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................ 126
3.4.2.1 CCDP and XPIC................................................................................................................................................... 126
3.4.2.2 System Configuration(with ODU)........................................................................................................................127
3.4.2.3 System Configuration (with RFU)....................................................................................................................... 130
3.4.2.4 XPIC Feature and 1+1 Protection Configuration................................................................................................. 131
3.4.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 134
3.4.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................134
3.4.5 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 135
3.4.6 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 136
3.4.10 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 140
3.5 N+1 Protection............................................................................................................................................................141
3.5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 141
3.5.2 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................ 142
3.5.2.1 System Configuration (Working with RFUs)....................................................................................................... 142
3.5.2.2 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 2, Working with ODUs) Protection............................................................145
3.5.2.3 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 3, Working with ODUs) Protection............................................................148
3.5.2.4 Protection Mode................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.5.2.5 Switching Condition............................................................................................................................................. 151
3.5.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 153
3.5.3.1 SDH Microwave................................................................................................................................................... 153
3.5.3.2 Integrated IP microwave.......................................................................................................................................155
3.5.4 Reference Standards and Protocols......................................................................................................................... 158
3.5.5 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................158
3.5.6 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 159
3.5.7 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 159
3.5.10 Relevant Alarms and Performance Events............................................................................................................ 162
3.5.11 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 162
3.6 ATPC.......................................................................................................................................................................... 164
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

3.6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 164

3.6.2 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 165
3.6.3 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................167
3.6.4 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 167
3.6.5 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 167
3.6.9 FAQs........................................................................................................................................................................ 170
3.7 AM..............................................................................................................................................................................170
3.7.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 170
3.7.2 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................ 172
3.7.2.1 E1 Service Priority................................................................................................................................................172
3.7.2.2 Ethernet Service Priority...................................................................................................................................... 174
3.7.2.3 AM booster........................................................................................................................................................... 174
3.7.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 175
3.7.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................178
3.7.5 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 179
3.7.6 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 179
3.7.10 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 183
3.8 PLA/EPLA/EPLA+.................................................................................................................................................... 184
3.8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 184
3.8.2 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................ 186
3.8.2.1 Port Types............................................................................................................................................................. 186
3.8.2.2 Switching Conditions........................................................................................................................................... 186
3.8.3 Principles................................................................................................................................................................. 188
3.8.3.1 PLA.......................................................................................................................................................................188
3.8.3.2 EPLA.................................................................................................................................................................... 191
3.8.3.3 EPLA+.................................................................................................................................................................. 193
3.8.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................196
3.8.5 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 197
3.8.6 Feature Updates....................................................................................................................................................... 198
3.8.10 FAQs...................................................................................................................................................................... 203
4 Safety Precautions..................................................................................................................... 205

4.1 Safety Precautions...................................................................................................................................................... 206
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

4.1.1 General Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................................206

4.1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols...................................................................................................................................207
4.1.3 Electrical Safety.......................................................................................................................................................208
4.1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.............................................................................................................................. 211
4.1.5 Storage Batteries...................................................................................................................................................... 211
4.1.6 Radiation..................................................................................................................................................................213
4.1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers................................................................................................................................ 213
4.1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure.................................................................................................................................... 215
4.1.6.3 Forbidden Areas................................................................................................................................................... 215
4.1.6.4 Laser..................................................................................................................................................................... 215
4.1.6.5 Microwave............................................................................................................................................................ 216
4.1.7 Working at Heights.................................................................................................................................................. 217
4.1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects........................................................................................................................................217
4.1.7.2 Using Ladders.......................................................................................................................................................218
4.1.8 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................... 220
4.1.9 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................... 221
4.2 Notices for High-Risk Operations.............................................................................................................................. 222
4.2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch........................................................................................................ 222
4.2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper..........................................................................................................................225
4.2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables.......................................................................................................................... 226
4.2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board............................................................................................................................228
5 Installation.................................................................................................................................. 230
6 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 231
6.1 Commissioning Process..............................................................................................................................................232
6.1.1 Site Commissioning Process................................................................................................................................... 232
6.1.2 System Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................................. 236
6.2 RFU Commissioning Tasks........................................................................................................................................ 237
6.2.1 Aligning the Antennas............................................................................................................................................. 237
6.2.1.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes................................................................................................................................... 237
6.2.1.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.................................................................................................................... 240
6.2.1.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas.......................................................................................................................243
6.2.2 Checking the RF Installation and Commissioning Quality..................................................................................... 246
6.2.3 Performing an SD Combination Hold-Off Compensation Test...............................................................................248
7 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 250
7.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................... 251
7.1.1 Channel Configuration............................................................................................................................................ 251
7.1.2 SD Combination...................................................................................................................................................... 252
7.2 Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................................253
7.3 Configuration Example (N+0 Links)..........................................................................................................................256
7.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 256
7.3.2 Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................................................................258
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

7.4 Configuration Example (N+1 Links)..........................................................................................................................264

7.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 264
7.4.2 Configuration Procedure..........................................................................................................................................265
8 Maintenance............................................................................................................................... 271
8.1 Part Replacement........................................................................................................................................................ 272
8.1.1 Replacing an RFU/ODU..........................................................................................................................................272
8.1.2 Replacing an IF Board............................................................................................................................................. 274
8.2 Alarm Reference.........................................................................................................................................................277
8.2.1 Alarm List................................................................................................................................................................277
8.2.1.1 RFU...................................................................................................................................................................... 277
8.2.1.2 RFUSD................................................................................................................................................................. 277
8.2.2 Alarms and Handling Procedures............................................................................................................................ 277
8.2.2.1 RFUSD_DELAY_UNEQUAL.............................................................................................................................277
8.2.2.2 RFUSD_SINGLE_RX..........................................................................................................................................278
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

RFU User Manual 1 System
1 System
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 950A can use ISM6 boards with RFUs to provide an N+0 or N+1 microwave
system with up to six channels.
1.1 Components
The OptiX RTN 950A uses ISM6 boards and RFUs to provide a multi-channel microwave
system. The system consists of an IDU, RFUs, BUs, and antenna systems.
1.2 RF System Configuration
The OptiX RTN 950A supports flexible and scalable microwave link configurations.
1.3 RF Specifications
This section describes the RF and IF specifications for a multi-channel microwave system
containing ISM6 boards and RFUs.
Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Components
The OptiX RTN 950A uses ISM6 boards and RFUs to provide a multi-channel microwave
system. The system consists of an IDU, RFUs, BUs, and antenna systems.
Overview
OptiX RTN 950A supports split structure.
l An IDU 950A connects to an RFU through an IF cable.
l An RFU is directly mounted on a BU.
l A BU connects to an antenna through a flexible waveguide. In space diversity (SD)
mode, a BU connects to an SD antenna through an elliptical waveguide or an RF cable.
Figure 1-1 OptiX RTN 950A multi-channel microwave system
RFUs
Branching unit
Antenna
IDU 950A
IDU 950A
The IDU 950A is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 950A multi-channel microwave system. It
receives and multiplexes services, performs switching and IF processing of services, and
provides system control and communication functions. Table 1-1 lists basic information about
the IDU 950A.

Table 1-1 Basic information about the IDU 950A

Item Description
Chassis height 2U
Pluggable Supported
Number of radio directions 1 to 6
RF configuration mode l N+0 non-protection (N ≤ 6)

l N+1 protection (N ≤ 5)
l 1+1 FD protection
l XPIC configuration
Service interface type l E1 interface

l T1 interface
l STM-1 optical/electrical interface
l FE optical/electrical interface
l GE optical/electrical interface
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950A

CSHO
RFU
An RFU is the transceiver of the OptiX RTN 950A multi-channel microwave system. It
performs functions such as frequency conversion and amplification of signals.
RFUs are available in two types according to support space diversity receiver or not:
l RFU-SD: space diversity (SD) receiver and IF combination supported. It provides three
RF ports: Tx, Main Rx and SD Rx.
l RFU-NonSD: SD not supported. It provides two RF ports: Tx and Rx. It provides a cost-
effective solution for scenarios with relatively good propagation conditions.
Mechanical specifications of an RFU-SD and an RFU-NonSD are the same. Figure 1-3
shows the appearance of an RFU-SD.

Table 1-2 RFU supported by the OptiX RTN 950A

Item Description
Series type XMC-LH

name
Frequency band L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/
scheme 1024QAM
Channel spacing 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

28/56 MHz (L6/7 GHz)
Figure 1-3 Appearance of an RFU
BU
NOTE
The appearance of a 3+0 or 2+0 BU is the same as that of a 4+0 BU. Matching loads are installed on RFU
ports not in use. A 4+0 BU is used as an example.
The BU is the signal combiner and splitter of the OptiX RTN 950A multi-channel microwave
system. A BU combines four channels of RF signals from RFUs into one for transmission.
BUs can be also cascaded.
BUs are available in two types: SD supported (BU-SD) and SD not supported (BU-NonSD).
Figure 1-4 shows the appearance of a BU-SD.

Figure 1-4 Appearance of a BU (in the case of the BU-SD)
1.2 RF System Configuration

The OptiX RTN 950A supports flexible and scalable microwave link configurations.
Overview
Typical microwave links configurations are as follows:
l 4+0/3+1 without SD, single polarization
l 6+0/5+1 without SD, single polarization
l 6+0/5+1 without SD, dual polarization
l 6+0/5+1 with SD, dual polarization
NOTE
To achieve co-channel dual polarization (CCDP), cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC)
technology is required. XPIC is implemented on IF boards.

4+0/3+1 (single polarization)
Figure 1-5 4+0/3+1 (single polarization) configuration
RFU
Main
RFU
BU
RFU
RFU
Antenna
IDU 950A
6+0/5+1 (single polarization)
Figure 1-6 6+0/5+1 (single polarization) configuration
RFU
Main
RFU
BU
RFU
Load
Antenna
Cascading
RFU
RFU Main
BU
RFU
Load
IDU 950A

6+0/5+1 (dual polarization)
Figure 1-7 6+0/5+1 (dual polarization) configuration
RFU
Main V
RFU
BU H
RFU
RFU
Antenna
RFU
RFU Main
BU
Load
Load
IDU 950A
6+0/5+1 (dual polarization, SD)
Figure 1-8 6+0/5+1 (dual polarization, SD) configuration
RFU-SD
Main V
RFU-SD
BU H
RFU-SD
SD
Load Main
Antenna
RFU-SD
RFU-SD Main
BU V
RFU-SD
SD H
Load
IDU 950A
SD
Antenna
1.3 RF Specifications
This section describes the RF and IF specifications for a multi-channel microwave system

1.3.1 Air Interface Capacity

The air interface capacity of a microwave link is determined by the microwave work mode.
The microwave work mode refers to the combination of the channel spacing and modulation
scheme.
Service capacity in SDH microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Table 1-3 Service capacity in SDH microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Service Capacity
28 (27.5) 128QAM STM-1
56 (55) 128QAM 2 x STM-1

NOTE
The SDH microwave mode supported by the equipment remains the same no matter whether XPIC is enabled or disabled.
Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Table 1-4 Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC disabled)
Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
(STM-1) in Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Hybrid n Header Header Header
Microwave Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK Strong 15 35 to 44 35 to 54 35 to 76 36 to 107
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 75 (1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481
28 256QAM 75 (1) 178 to 225 179 to 275 181 to 389 185 to 546
28 512QAM 75 (1) 190 to 240 191 to 294 194 to 415 197 to 583
28 512QAM 75 (1) 202 to 256 203 to 313 206 to 441 210 to 620
Light
28 1024QAM 75 (1) 213 to 270 215 to 330 217 to 466 221 to 654


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 257 to 325 259 to 398 262 to 561 267 to 788
40 512QAM 75 (1) 274 to 347 276 to 424 280 to 599 285 to 841
40 512QAM 75 (1) 291 to 369 293 to 451 297 to 636 303 to 893
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 307 to 389 309 to 475 313 to 671 319 to 941
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 363 to 460 366 to 562 370 to 794 377 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 392 to 497 396 to 608 401 to 858 408 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 416 to 527 420 to 645 425 to 910 433 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 440 to 558 444 to 682 450 to 963 458 to 1000

Table 1-5 Service capacity in integrated IP radio mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC enabled)
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 74 (1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481
28 256QAM 75 (1) 176 to 224 178 to 273 180 to 386 183 to 542
28 512QAM 75 (1) 182 to 231 184 to 282 186 to 398 189 to 559
28 512QAM 75 (1) 194 to 246 195 to 300 198 to 424 201 to 595
Light
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 255 to 323 257 to 395 260 to 557 265 to 782
40 512QAM 75 (1) 263 to 333 265 to 407 268 to 575 273 to 807
40 512QAM 75 (1) 279 to 354 282 to 433 285 to 611 291 to 858
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 298 to 377 300 to 461 304 to 651 310 to 914
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 359 to 455 362 to 556 366 to 785 373 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 377 to 477 380 to 584 385 to 824 392 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 400 to 506 403 to 619 408 to 874 416 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 426 to 540 429 to 660 435 to 931 443 to 1000
NOTE
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes
to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with a
length ranging from 70 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with a
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The
bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can
be provided for Ethernet services.
1.3.2 EPLA Service Throughput

The EPLA service throughput indicates the service throughput of a radio link when EPLA or
enhanced N+1 protection is configured for the link.
The typical networking for EPLA is shown in Figure 1-9. The EPLA service throughput is
different from the specification in 1.3.1 Air Interface Capacity.
l The service throughput of each EPLA member link is provided in Table 1-6 and Table
1-7.
l If the access bandwidth on the user side exceeds 1 Gbit/s, load to balancing LAG must
be configured for service access.

Figure 1-9 EPLA configuration networking

IDU 950A IDU 950A
RFU RFU
ISM6 N+0 radio link ISM6
GE1 RFU RFU GE1
Packet Packet
GE2 GE2
Processing ... ... ... ... Processing
GE3 Unit Unit GE3
RFU RFU
LAG ISM6 ISM6 LAG
RFU RFU
EPLA group EPLA group
NOTE
The throughput specifications in the table are obtained under the following conditions: the frame length
range is from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes, frame header compression is disabled, and the air to interface links
transmit Ethernet services only.
Table 1-6 Throughput of a single EPLA link (LH ACCP mode, XPIC disabled)
Modulation Scheme Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
28 MHz Channel 40 MHz Channel 56 MHz Channel
QPSK Strong 32 to 39 47 to 57 68 to 82
QPSK 38 to 46 55 to 67 79 to 96
16QAM Strong 66 to 80 95 to 115 136 to 165
16QAM 77 to 93 112 to 135 159 to 193
32QAM 98 to 119 147 to 178 200 to 242
64QAM 118 to 143 176 to 212 253 to 305
128QAM 146 to 177 208 to 251 297 to 359
256QAM 166 to 201 240 to 290 339 to 410
512QAM 177 to 214 256 to 310 367 to 444
512QAM Light 189 to 228 272 to 329 389 to 470
1024QAM 199 to 241 287 to 347 412 to 498
Table 1-7 Throughput of a single EPLA link (LH ACCP mode, XPIC enabled)
QPSK Strong 32 to 39 47 to 57 68 to 82
QPSK 38 to 46 55 to 67 79 to 96

16QAM Strong 66 to 80 95 to 115 136 to 165
16QAM 77 to 93 112 to 135 159 to 193
32QAM 98 to 119 147 to 178 200 to 242
64QAM 118 to 143 176 to 212 253 to 305
128QAM 146 to 177 208 to 251 297 to 359
256QAM 165 to 199 238 to 288 335 to 406
512QAM 170 to 206 246 to 297 352 to 426
512QAM Light 181 to 219 261 to 316 373 to 452
1024QAM N/A 278 to 336 398 to 481
1.3.3 RFU Performance

The main technical specifications of the RFU include frequency bands, modulation mode, and
transceiver performance.
Operating Frequency Band
Table 1-8 Operating frequency band (XMC-LH RFU)

Operating Frequency Range (GHz)
Frequency Band
Transmit Frequency of a TX Transmit Frequency of a TX
High Site (Receive Low Site (Receive Frequency
Frequency of a TX Low Site) of a TX High Site)
L6 GHz 6.175 to 6.425 5.925 to 6.173
U6 GHz 6.765 to 7.125 6.425 to 6.785
7 GHz 7.275 to 7.897 7.093 to 7.707
8 GHz 8.0165 to 8.497 7.725 to 8.377
11 GHz 11.199 to 11.745 10.675 to 11.215

NOTE
l Frequency ranges shown in the table are Tx/Rx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not
the channel center frequencies. The minimum central frequency is at least half of the channel
spacing higher than the minimum transmit frequency. The maximum central frequency is at least
half of the channel spacing lower than the maximum transmit frequency.
l The frequencies of an RFU's transmitter and receiver are separately set and they support multiple
T/R spacing values. Therefore, the transmit frequency ranges of the TX high and TX low sites are
not strictly symmetrical.
Typical T/R spacings include:
l L6 GHz frequency band: 252.04 MHz
l U6 GHz frequency band: 340 MHz
l 7GHz frequency band: 154 MHz, 161 MHz, 168 MHz, 196 MHz, 245 MHz
l 8GHz frequency band: 208 MHz, 266 MHz, 310 MHz, 311.32 MHz
l 11GHz frequency band: 490 MHz, 530 MHz
Modulation Scheme
Table 1-9 Modulation scheme (XMC-LH RFU)

Item Performance
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
Channel 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

spacing 28/56 MHz (L6/7 GHz)
NOTE
Cooperated with IF boards, RFUs also support QPSK Strong, 16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light
working modes. Strong and light indicate FEC coding strength. Strong FEC improves receiver
sensitivity by increasing error-correcting codes. Light FEC expands service capacity by reducing error-
correcting codes.
Transceiver Performance
Table 1-10 Transceiver performance (XMC-LH RFU)

Item Performance
QPSK/ 64QAM/ 256QAM/ 1024QAM

16QAM/ 128QAM 512QAM
32QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)
@L6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@U6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@7 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@8 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5

Item Performance

32QAM
@11 GHz 29.5 29.5 27.5 26.5
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@L6 GHz 6
@U6 GHz 6
@7 GHz 6
@8 GHz 6
@11 GHz 6
Nominal -20 -25

maximum
receive power
(dBm)
Frequency ±5
stability (ppm)
NOTE
When the T/R spacing is not an integer in unit of MHz, the frequency accuracy is not ±5 ppm but meets
the requirement of the ETSI.
1.3.4 BU Performance
Insertion loss is a key electrical performance indicator for a branching unit.
NOTE
l Insertion loss data is provided by hop, including TX insertion loss and RX insertion loss.
l The BU performance provided in the following table applies to both adjacent channel configuration
and non-adjacent channel configuration.
Table 1-11 Insertion loss
Frequency Band Channel Insertion Loss Per Hop (dB)

Bandwidth (MHz)
single BU Two BUs
(4+0/3+0/2+0)a cascadingb
L6 GHz 28 5.7 7.6
56 5.3 7.2
U6 GHz 28 5.9 7.8


Bandwidth (MHz)
single BU Two BUs
40 5.5 7.4
56 5.5 7.4
7 GHz 28 6.3 8.4
56 5.9 8
8 GHz 28 6.7 8.8
40 6.1 8.2
56 6.1 8.2
7&8 GHzc 28 6.7 8.8
56 6.1 8.2
11 GHz 28 7.1 9.4
40 6.5 8.8
56 6.5 8.8
NOTE
l a: The insertion loss per hop of a single BU for 3+0 BU and 2+0 BU is the same with the 4+0 BU.
l b: When two different or same BUs cascade, the insertion loss per hop is same.
l c: 7&8 GHz BUs are wideband BUs. They combine and split 7 GHz and 8 GHz RF signals.
1.3.5 Receiver Sensitivity

The receiver sensitivity reflects the anti-fading capability of the microwave equipment.
NOTE
Receiver sensitivity remains the same values for various channel configurations (no matter the channels
are enabled with XPIC or not). However, the modulation modes supported by different types of channel
configurations are different.
For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value.
Both ISV3 and ISM6 boards support Long Haul (LH). The receiver sensitivities for the two types of
boards are the same in the LH scenario. ISM6 boards only support split LH.
Table 1-12 Typical receiver sensitivity (LH ACCP mode)

Channel Modulati Receiver Sensitivity (dBm, @ BER=10-6)
Spacing on
(MHz) L6 GHz U6 GHz 7 GHz 8 GHz 11 GHz
28 QPSK -90.2 -90.2 -90.2 -90.2 -89.7

Strong


Spacing on
28 QPSK -88.8 -88.8 -88.8 -88.8 -88.3
28 16QAM -83.1 -83.1 -83.1 -83.1 -82.6

Strong
28 16QAM -81.6 -81.6 -81.6 -81.6 -81.1
28 32QAM -78.4 -78.4 -78.4 -78.4 -77.9
28 64QAM -75.8 -75.8 -75.8 -75.8 -75.3
28 128QAM -72.6 -72.6 -72.6 -72.6 -72.1
28 256QAM -69.8 -69.8 -69.8 -69.8 -69.3
28 512QAM -67.5 -67.5 -67.5 -67.5 -67
28 512QAM -66.5 -66.5 -66.5 -66.5 -66

Light
28 1024QAM -63.9 -63.9 -63.9 -63.9 -63.4
40 QPSK N/A -88.9 N/A -88.9 -88.4

Strong
40 QPSK N/A -87.4 N/A -87.4 -86.9
40 16QAM N/A -81.3 N/A -81.3 -80.8

Strong
40 16QAM N/A -79.8 N/A -79.8 -79.3
40 32QAM N/A -76.1 N/A -76.1 -75.6
40 64QAM N/A -73.7 N/A -73.7 -73.2
40 128QAM N/A -71 N/A -71 -70.5
40 256QAM N/A -68.1 N/A -68.1 -67.6
40 512QAM N/A -65.8 N/A -65.8 -65.3
40 512QAM N/A -65 N/A -65 -64.5

Light
40 1024QAM N/A -62.9 N/A -62.9 -62.4
56 QPSK -87.1 -87.1 -87.1 -87.1 -86.6

Strong
56 QPSK -85.6 -85.6 -85.6 -85.6 -85.1
56 16QAM -79.9 -79.9 -79.9 -79.9 -79.4

Strong
56 16QAM -78.5 -78.5 -78.5 -78.5 -78


Spacing on
56 32QAM -75.7 -75.7 -75.7 -75.7 -75.2
56 64QAM -72.1 -72.1 -72.1 -72.1 -71.6
56 128QAM -69.6 -69.6 -69.6 -69.6 -69.1
56 256QAM -66.8 -66.8 -66.8 -66.8 -66.3
56 512QAM -64.2 -64.2 -64.2 -64.2 -63.7
56 512QAM -63.2 -63.2 -63.2 -63.2 -62.7

Light
56 1024QAM -60.9 -60.9 -60.9 -60.9 -60.4

NOTE
When the XPIC function is enabled, the 28MHz/1024QAM working mode is not supported.

RFU User Manual 2 Hardware
2 Hardware
About This Chapter
This section describes ISM6 boards, RFUs, BUs, and antenna feeder accessories in a multi-
channel microwave system. For information about other boards, cables, and accessories, see
the OptiX RTN 950A Hardware Description.
2.1 Chassis
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950A is a chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.2 Board List
The IDU 950A provides various functions with different boards inserted.
2.3 ISM6
ISM6 boards are new-generation dual-channel IF boards. Each ISM6 board provides two IF
ports.
2.4 RFU
A radio frequency unit (RFU) is an RF transceiver mainly used to convert the frequency and
amplify the power of signals.
2.5 Branching Unit
A branching unit is a radio frequency (RF) divider/combiner.
2.6 Antennas
The microwave device uses the parabolic antennas to transmit and receive electromagnetic
waves.
2.7 Feeder
A feeder is used to connect an antenna and a BU.

2.1 Chassis
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950A is a chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950A chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The
IDU 950A chassis has a air-cooled four-layered structure.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950A.
Figure 2-1 Structure of the IDU 950A chassis
Figure 2-2 Slots of the IDU 950A
Slot 7 (CSHO)
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT)

(FAN)
Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)
2.1.2 Installation Methods

The IDU 950A can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of
racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 950A can be installed:
l In a 300 mm-deep European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm-deep ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm-deep 19-inch cabinet
l In a 600 mm-deep 19-inch cabinet
l In a 19-inch open rack
l In a wireless-equipment outdoor cabinet
l On a wall
l On a table

2.1.3 Air Duct

An IDU 950A chassis supports air cooling, with air inlet on the left side and air outlet on the
right side.
Figure 2-3 shows the air duct in an IDU 950A chassis.
Figure 2-3 Air duct in an IDU 950A chassis
2.1.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are attached to their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards.
Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks,
thereby avoiding bodily injuries or damage to the IDU.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description
ESD protection Indicates that

label the equipment
is sensitive to
static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the

grounding
position of the
IDU chassis.
CAUTION Fan warning Warns you not

label to touch fan
leaves when
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers and
other body parts away .
严禁在风扇旋转时接触扇
the fan is
rotating.
叶！
High Indicates that

temperature the board
warning label surface
temperature
may exceed
70°C when the
ambient
temperature is
higher than
55°C. In such a
case, wear
protective
gloves to
handle the
board.
Power caution Instructs you to

label read related
instructions
before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification Indicates that

card label the equipment
has been
quality
checked.
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

Label Label Name Description
RoHS label Indicates that

the equipment
complies with
the related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS
directive.
Product Indicates the

A nameplate label product name
-48V; 12.8A
and
certification.
! W A R N IN G Operation Instruct you to

-48V O U T P U T
TURN O FF PO W ER BEFO RE
D IS C O N N E C T IN G IF C A B LE
warning label turn off the
ODU power
switch before
removing an IF
cable.
Operation Instructs you to

guidance label slightly pull
the switch
PULL lever outwards
before setting
the switch to
the "I" or "O"
position.
Operation Instructs you to

warning label disconnect the
IF cable from
the IDU before
connecting the
IF cable to the
ODU.
Label Position
Figure 2-4 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU 950A chassis.

Figure 2-4 Positions of the IDU 950A labels
!
A
-48V; 12.8A
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
50
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
CAUTION TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers
and other body
parts away.
严禁在风扇旋转时接
触扇叶！
2.2 Board List

The IDU 950A provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 2-5 IDU slot layout
Slot 7 (CSHO)
Slot 11 Slot 5 (EXT) Slot 6 (EXT)

(FAN)
NOTE
"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 2-2 List of the IDU boards

Board Board Valid Description
Acrony Name Slot
m
CSHO Hybrid Slot 7 l Provides full time-division cross-connections of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4

system services equivalent up to 32x32 VC-4s.
control, l Provides a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capability.
switching
, and l The new SLF2CSHO board supports L3VPN functions (SLF2 is the
timing functional version).
board l Performs system communication and control.
l Provides two -48 V DC power input ports.
l Supports the clock processing function, providing one external clock
input/output port and two external time input/output ports. The first
external time port uses the same physical connector as the external
clock port.
l Uses SFP modules to provide two STM-1 optical/electrical ports.
When CSHO boards work with MN1 boards, these ports can be
configured as channelized STM-1 ports, which support CES E1s and
ML-PPP E1s.
l Provides sixteen TDM E1/T1 ports. SupportsE1 ports support 75-
ohm/120-ohm adaptive impedance. T1 ports support 100-ohm
impedance. The mode of a TDM E1/T1 port can be configured
through software. Only SLF2CSHO boards support T1 ports. When
CSHO boards work with MN1 boards, these TDM E1 ports can be
configured as Smart E1 ports, which support CES E1s, ML-PPP E1s,
and fractional E1s.
l Provides six GE ports, of which four can only be RJ45 GE electrical
ports and the other two can be GE/FE optical ports or GE electrical
ports equipped with SFP modules. The GE electrical ports are
compatible with the FE electrical ports.
l Provides one Ethernet NM port, one NM serial port, and one NM
cascading port.
l Provides one Huawei outdoor cabinet monitoring port, which uses the
same physical connector as the second external time port.
l Provides a USB port that allows software to be upgraded and data to
be backed up using a USB flash drive. It can house a Wi-Fi module so
that the Mobile LCT can access and manage the NE.


Acrony Name Slot
m
ISU2 Universal Slot 1 to l Provides one IF port.

IF board Slot 6 l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave using the
Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet, or SDH service mode.
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports air-interface bandwidth acceleration (Ethernet frame header
compression).
l Supports the PLA function.
l Supports the EPLA function on OptiX RTN 950A.
ISX2 General- Slot 1 to l Provides one IF port.

purpose Slot 6 l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
XPIC IF
board l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave using the
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM booster function.
compression).


Acrony Name Slot
m
ISV3 Versatile slot 1 to 6 l Provides one IF port.

IF board l Supports multiple IF running modes:
– IS3: The highest-order modulation mode is 2048QAM. When
working in IS3 mode, ISV3 boards can interconnect with each
other or with RTN 905s.
NOTE
When working at a channel spacing 3.5 MHz, ISV3 boards can
interconnect only with ISV3 boards.
– IS2: The highest-order modulation mode is 256QAM. When
working in IS2 mode, ISV3 boards can interconnect with ISU2/
ISX2 boards.
l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave using the
l Supports the XPIC function.
compression) and enhanced Ethernet frame compression (payload
compression).
l Supports AES256-based encryption at air interfaces.
l Supports the EPLA/EPLA+ function on OptiX RTN 950A.
ISM6 Two- slot 1 to 6 Working with RFU Working with IDU

channel
versatile
IF board


Acrony Name Slot
m
l Provides two IF interfaces. l Provides two IF interfaces.

The two IF interfaces can be used The two IF interfaces can be
together or independently. used together or
l Supports integrated IP radio and independently.
SDH radio. Available service l Supports multiple IF running
modes include Native modes when applied on
E1+Ethernet, Native products to work with ODUs:
STM-1+Ethernet, and SDH. – IS6: The highest-order
l Supports 1+1 protection for two modulation mode is
intra-board IF channels. 4096QAM. The maximum
l Supports XPIC, which is channel spacing is 112
implemented based on the two IF MHz (in witch the
channels on the board. highest-order modulation
mode is 512QAM).
l Supports 1+1 protection for an
XPIC group, which is – IS3: The highest-order
implemented based on two modulation mode is
boards. 2048QAM. When working
in IS3 mode, ISM6 boards
l Supports AM. can interconnect with
l Supports air-interface bandwidth ISV3 boards (only when
acceleration (Ethernet frame working at a non-3.5 MHz
header compression). channel spacing) or RTN
l Supports intra-board PLA. 905.
l Supports EPLA. – IS2: The highest-order
modulation mode is
l Supports QPSK to 1024QAM 256QAM. When working
modulation plus QPSK/16QAM in IS2 mode, ISM6 boards
strong FEC, and 512QAM light can interconnect with
FEC. ISU2/ISX2 boards.
l Supports integrated IP radio
and SDH radio. Available
service modes include Native
E1+Ethernet, Native
STM-1+Ethernet, and SDH.
l Supports 1+1 protection for
two intra-board IF channels.
l Supports XPIC, which is
implemented based on the
two IF channels on the board.
l Supports 1+1 protection for
an XPIC group, which is
implemented based on two
boards.
l Supports intra-board PLA.
l Supports EPLA/EPLA+.


Acrony Name Slot
m
l Supports AM.
l Supports air-interface
bandwidth acceleration
(Ethernet frame header
compression).
l Hardware ready for the
multiple-input multiple-
output (MIMO) function.
IFU2 Universal slot 1 to 6 l Provides one IF port.

IF board l Supports modulation schemes from QPSK to 256QAM.
l Supports integrated IP microwave using the Native E1+Ethernet
service mode.
SL1DA 2xSTM-1 slot 1 to 6 l Uses SFP modules to provide two STM-1 optical/electrical ports.
interface l Support K-byte transparent transmission.
board
CQ1 4-port slot 1 to 6 l Uses the SFP optical modules to provide four channelized STM-1
channeliz optical/electrical ports.
ed l Supports CES E1 and ML-PPP E1 processing for E1s in STM-1
STM-1 frames.
interface
board l Transmits overhead bytes over CES E1s.
EM6D 2x10GE/ slot 1/3/5 l Uses SFP+/SFP optical modules to provide two GE, 2.5GE, or 10GE
GE optical ports.
+4xGE l Uses SFP+/SFP optical modules to provide two GE or 2.5GE optical
Ethernet ports. 2.5GE optical ports connect only to OptiX RTN 380s.
Service
Processin l Provides two GE electrical ports.
g Board l Supports Super Dual Band.
with
Super
Dual
Band
Feature
EG4 2-port slot 1 to 6 l Provides four GE ports, of which two can be RJ45 GE electrical ports
RJ45/SFP or SFP GE optical ports and the other two can only be RJ45 GE
+ 2-port electrical ports. The GE electrical ports are compatible with the FE
RJ45 electrical ports.
Gigabit l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
Ethernet
interface l Supports the IEEE 1588v2.
board


Acrony Name Slot
m
EG4P 2-port slot 1 to 6 l Provides four GE ports, of which two can be RJ45 GE electrical ports
RJ45/SFP or SFP GE optical ports and the other two can only be RJ45 GE
+ 2-port electrical ports supporting the power over Ethernet function. The GE
RJ45 electrical ports are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
Gigabit l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
Ethernet
interface l Supports the IEEE 1588v2.
board
with the
power
supply
function
EFP8 8-port slot 1 to 6 l Provides eight FE electrical ports.

RJ45 FE l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE port.
EoPDH
processin l Processes EoPDH services. The total VCG bandwidth is 63xE1.
g board l Supports transparently transmitted services and L2 switched services.
with the l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
switching
function
EMS6 4-port slot 1 to 6 l Provides four FE electrical ports.

RJ45 and l Uses SFP modules to provide two GE optical ports or GE electrical
2-port ports. The GE electrical ports are compatible with the FE electrical
SFP ports.
FE/GE
EoSDH l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE port.
processin l Processes EoSDH services. The total VCG bandwidth is 622 Mbit/s.
g board
with the l Supports transparently transmitted Ethernet services and L2 switched
switching services.
function l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
ML1 16xE1 slot 1 to 6 l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 ports.

(Smart) l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, and Fractional E1
tributary functions.
board
MD1 32xE1 slot 1 to 6 l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 ports.

(Smart) l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, ML-PPP E1, and Fractional E1
tributary functions.
board


Acrony Name Slot
m
MN1 Multi- slot 3 or 4 l Provides multi-protocol function extension, and supports the CES and
protocol ML-PPP functions.
processin l After MN1 boards are configured, STM-1 ports on CSHO boards can
g board be configured as channelized STM-1 ports, and E1 ports can be
configured as Smart E1 ports. E1 channels over channelized STM-1
ports support the CES E1 and ML-PPP functions. Smart E1 ports
support CES E1, ML-PPP E1, and fractional E1 functions.
l Has no port on its front panel.
SP3S 16xE1 slot 1 to 6 Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 ports or 100-ohm TDM
tributary T1 ports whose modes can be configured through software.
board
SP3D 32xE1 slot 1 to 6 Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 ports or 100-ohm TDM
tributary T1 ports whose modes can be configured through software.
board
AUX Auxiliary slot 1 to 6 Provides one orderwire port, one asynchronous data port, one
interface synchronous data port, and four-input and two-output external alarm
board ports.
TCU6 6xE1 slot 1 to 6 Provides one DB44 connector and six RJ45 connectors. When used with
connector an E1 tributary board and an Anea 96-to-DB44 transit cable, it converts
conversio E1s 1 to 6 on the Anea 96 connector into RJ45 connectors.
n board
FAN Fan board slot 11 Air-cools the IDU.
2.3 ISM6
ISM6 boards are new-generation dual-channel IF boards. Each ISM6 board provides two IF
ports.
2.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of ISM6 boards is SL91.
2.3.2 Application
An ISM6 board provides two IF ports. The two IF ports can be used to implement XPIC, 1+1
HSB/FD/SD, or PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ in one microwave direction, or provide radio links in
different directions.
NOTE
Transmission on a microwave link with ISM6s working with RFUs is similar to that with ISM6s
working with ODUs.

Scenario Where Two IF Ports Are Applied in the Same Microwave Direction
ISM6 boards support XPIC/PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ between intra-board ports as well as 1+1
HSB/FD/SD between intra- and inter-board ports. The 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection between
inter-board ports is supported only when XPIC is enabled between intra-board ports.
Figure 2-6 Scenario where two IF ports are applied in the same microwave direction
E1/STM-1 Service Service

E1/STM-1
board board
FE/GE Control ISM6 Control FE/GE
ISM6
board board
STM-1/4
STM-1/4
GE GE
OptiX RTN 900
Scenario Where Two IF Ports Are Applied in Different Microwave Directions

An ISM6 board can transmit packets in two microwave directions through its two IF ports.
Figure 2-7 Scenario where two IF ports are applied in different microwave directions

2.3.3 Functions and Features

ISM6 boards receive and transmit 2xIF signals, provide management channels to ODUs, and
supply -48 V power to ODUs.
ISM6 boards implement Ethernet and packet service functions by working with packet
switching units on system control, switching, and timing boards.
Table 2-3 Functions and features that ISM6 boards support

Function and Description
Feature
Working with RFUs Working with ODUs
Basic functions l Receives and transmits 2xIF l Receives and transmits 2xIF
signals. signals.
l Provides management l Provides management
channels to RFU-NonSDs/ channels to ODUs.
RFU-SDs. l Supplies -48 V power to
l Supplies -48 V power to ODUs.
RFU-NonSDs/RFU-SDs.
Radio types l Integrated IP microwave

l SDH radio
NOTE
Integrated IP microwave is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.
Service types in l Native E1 + Ethernet

Integrated IP l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
microwave mode
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are
encapsulated into pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets.
The total number of Native E1 services that the two IF ports receive/transmit
must not exceed 126.
Service types in l STM-1

SDH radio mode l 2xSTM-1
NOTE
If one IF port provides 2xSTM-1 radio, the other IF port can provide only
integrated IP radio (native E1+Ethernet).


Feature
Running modes l LH ACCP mode l IS6 mode, which is the

default mode. In this mode,
the modulation schemes
QPSK-4096QAM and the
two extended modulation
schemes QPSK Strong and
16QAM Strong are
supported. The 112 MHz
channel spacing is supported,
and in this channel spacing,
the modulation schemes
QPSK-512QAM and the two
extended modulation
schemes QPSK Strong and
16QAM Strong are
supported.
l IS3 mode. In this mode, the
modulation schemes
QPSK-2048QAM and the
four extended modulation
schemes QPSK Strong,
16QAM Strong, and
512QAM Light, and
1024QAM Light are
supported. ISM6 boards can
interconnect only with ISV3
boards or the RTN 905.
l IS2 mode. In this mode, the
modulation schemes
QPSK-256QAM are
supported. ISM6 boards can
interconnect only with ISU2/
ISX2 boards.


Feature
NOTE
l Compared with QPSK/
16QAM, QPSK Strong/
16QAM Strong has stronger
FEC capability, and therefore
has better receiver sensitivity. It
has, however, less air interface
bandwidth. Compared with
512QAM/1024QAM,
512QAM Light/1024QAM
Light has weaker FEC
capability, and therefore has
worse receiver sensitivity. It
has, however, higher air
interface bandwidth.
l Once the running mode of
either port on the ISM6 is
changed, the other port
automatically changes to the
same running mode.
Modulation schemes LH ACCP mode: QPSK Strong/ l IS6 mode: QPSK Strong/
QPSK/16QAM Strong/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM Strong/
32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/ 16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
256QAM/512QAM/512QAM 128QAM/256QAM/
Light/1024QAM 512QAM/1024QAM/
NOTE 2048QAM/4096QAM
Compared with QPSK/16QAM, l IS3 mode: QPSK Strong/
QPSK Strong/16QAM Strong has
QPSK/16QAM Strong/
stronger FEC capability, and
therefore has better receiver 16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/
sensitivity. It has, however, less air 128QAM/256QAM/
interface bandwidth. Compared 512QAM/512QAM Light/
with 512QAM/1024QAM, 1024QAM/1024QAM Light/
512QAM Light/1024QAM Light 2048QAM
has weaker FEC capability, and
therefore has worse receiver l IS2 mode: QPSK/16QAM/
sensitivity. It has, however, higher 32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/
air interface bandwidth. 256QAM
NOTE
l In IS3 mode, 2048QAM is
supported only when AM is
enabled.
l The highest-order modulation
scheme that can be used by an
IF port is determined based on
factors such as the ODU
frequency band, XPIC status,
and channel spacing. For
details, see 2.3.7 Technical
Specifications.


Feature
112 MHz channel Not supported Supported (only in IS6 mode)

spacing NOTE
If a channel spacing of 112 MHz is
configured for one port of the two
ports on an ISM6 board, the
channel spacing of the other port
automatically changes to 112 MHz.
Similarly, when the channel
spacing of one port of the two ports
on an ISM6 board changes from
112 MHz to another value, the
channel spacing of the other port
changes to the new value
accordingly.
Backplane bus l 1 Gbit/s for slots 4 and 6 when EPLA is supported and 2.5
bandwidth Gbit/s for slots 4 and 6 when EPLA is not supported
l 2.5 Gbit/s for the others.
MIMO Hardware ready
Automatic transmit Supported

power control
(ATPC)
Adaptive Supported only in Integrated IP microwave mode

modulation (AM)
E1 priorities Supported only if native TDM services transmitted over Integrated

IP microwave are E1 services
Compression of Supported
Ethernet frame
headers
XPIC Supported (only between two IF ports on a board)
Radio working See ISM6 Board Technical See ISM6 Board Technical
mode Specifications (Working with Specifications (Working with
RFUs) ODUs).


Feature
Link 1+1 Supports 1+1 FD Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD

protectio protectio NOTE NOTE
n n (HSB l 1+1 FD protection is supported l 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is
stands between intra-board ports. supported between intra-board
for hot ports.
l 1+1 FD protection is supported
standby, between inter-board ports only l 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is
FD when XPIC is enabled between supported between inter-board
stands intra-board ports. ports only when XPIC is
for enabled between intra-board
frequenc ports.
y
diversity,
and SD
stands
for space
diversity.
)
N+1 Supported
protectio
n
Link Supported
aggregat
ion
groups
(LAGs)
at air
interface
s
Physical Supported
link NOTE
aggregat Inter-board PLA is not supported.
ion
(PLA/
EPLA/
EPLA+)
TDM service Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP)

protection
K byte pass-through Supported
Ethernet service See Table 2-4.

functions
Multiprotocol Label Refer to the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the

Switching (MPLS) sections about system control, switching, and timing boards.
functions


Feature
PWE3 functions
Clock Physical Air interface clock

layer
synchron
ization
Physical l Protection implemented by providing clock sources with

-layer different priorities
clock l Protection implemented by running the Synchronization Status
protectio Message (SSM) protocol
n
l Protection implemented by running the extended SSM protocol
Packet Supports IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization.

time
synchron
ization
Packet Not supported

frequenc
y
synchron
ization
Data Inband Supports inband DCN. DCN bandwidth is configurable.

commun DCN
ication
network Outband l Supports one data communications channel (DCC) that is
(DCN) DCN composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP
microwave mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12
bytes, or D1-D12 bytes for each channel in SDH radio mode.
Operatio Loopbac l Supports inloops and outloops at IF ports.

n and k l Supports inloops and outloops at composite (COMP) ports.
manage
ment Cold and Supported
warm
resetting
In- Supported
service
field
program
mable
gate
array
(FPGA)
loading


Feature
Pseudo Supported
random
binary
sequence
(PRBS)
test at IF
ports
Manufac Supported
turer
informat
ion
query
Power Supported
consump
tion
query
Tempera Supported
ture
monitori
ng
Voltage Supported
monitori
ng
Table 2-4 Ethernet service functions
Function and Feature Description
Ethernet Native Ethernet l E-Line services

services services – Port-based E-line services
– VLAN-based E-line services
– E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-LAN services
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
– E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges
PWE3 Ethernet l E-Line services carried by PWs

services l E-Aggr services carried by PWs
l E-LAN services carried by PWs, that is, virtual
private LAN services (VPLSs)

Function and Feature Description
Ethernet ring protection switching Supported (complies with ITU-T G.8032 v1/v2)
(ERPS)
Operation, administration, and l Supports ETH OAM functions that comply with
management (OAM) IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah.
l Supports frame loss measurement, frame delay
measurement, and delay variation measurement
functions that comply with ITU-T Y.1731.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree
(CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the
same functions as Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).
Quality of service (QoS) Refer to the description of QoS functions provided in

the sections about system control, switching, and
timing boards.
Remote network monitoring Supported

(RMON)
2.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how the function units of an ISM6 board process Integrated IP
microwave IF signals.
NOTE
ISM6 boards process signals transmitted over SDH radio in the same way as they process signals
transmitted over Integrated IP radio. The only differences are with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.

Function Block Diagram
Figure 2-8 ISM6 board function block diagram

Backplane
SMODEM unit HSM signal bus

Paired board
ODU control signal
processing
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Logic
unit
processing
Combiner
interface
System control and

IF
unit
unit
Microwave Overhead communication unit

IF
frame signal MODEM bus

unit
Ethernet GE bus
(Digital
processing Packet switching unit
XPIC)
processing
Combiner
unit
interface
IF
unit
unit
IF
System control and

communication unit
Control bus
Logic
SMODEM unit control unit
-48 V power
supplied to an ODU Power -48 V 1
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
other units on the board unit -48 V 2
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to Clock

System clock signal
other units on the board unit
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 2-5 Signal processing in the receive direction of an ISM6 board
Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface Separates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals

unit from microwave service signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control

signals.
l Transmits RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control
signals to the system control and communication
unit.
3 IF processing unit Filters signals, performs analog/digital conversion, and

transmits the converted signals to the modem unit.

4 Modem unit l If XPIC is disabled, performs digital demodulation.

l If XPIC is enabled, performs XPIC operations for IF
signals.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs forward error correction (FEC) decoding
and generates alarms, if any.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

alarms and performance events, if any.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and
generates alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Detects changes in both ATPC messages and
response messages, and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), and DCC bytes from
microwave frames, and transmits the bytes to the
logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to specific positions in
VC-4s and transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit (if native TDM services transmitted
over Integrated IP microwave are E1 services).
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit (if
native TDM services transmitted over Integrated IP
microwave are STM-1 services).
l Extracts Ethernet signals from the microwave
service signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals to
the Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching
unit.
7 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication
signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE
In inter-boards 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to
the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality
signals for subsequent processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 2-6 Signal processing in the transmit direction of an ISM6 board

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Processes overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit (if native TDM
services transmitted over Integrated IP microwave
are E1 services).
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals from the logic
processing unit to form STM-1 signals (if native
TDM services transmitted over Integrated IP
microwave are STM-1 services).
l Sets overheads for microwave frames.
l Combines Ethernet signals, E1/STM-1 service
signals, and microwave frame overheads to form
microwave frames.
4 Modem unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.
5 IF processing unit l Performs digital/analog conversion.

l Performs digital modulation.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
6 SMODEM unit Modulates RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals

from the system control and communication unit.
7 Combiner interface Combines RFU-NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU control signals,

unit microwave service signals, and -48 V power signals,
and transmits the combined signals through an IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication
unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board

over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance
events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies -48 V power to an RFU-NonSD/RFU-
SD/ODU after performing DC-DC conversion.
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus on the backplane, and supplies +3.3 V power to other units on the ISV3 board
after performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
2.3.5 Front Panel

An ISM6 board has indicators, two IF port, and labels on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 2-9 Front panel of an ISM6 board

ISM6
! WARNING-48V OUTPUT:
STAT
IF1 IF2
SRV
DISCONNECT IF CABLE FROM

IDU BEFORE CONMECTING
IF CABLE TO ODU
ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

LINK1
Indicators
Table 2-7 Status explanation for indicators on an ISM6 board

Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.
On (red) The board hardware is

faulty.
Off The board is not working,

not created, or not powered
on.
SRV On (green) Services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarm has

been reported.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

has been reported.
LINK1 On (green) The first microwave link is

normal.
On (red) The first microwave link is

faulty.
Off l The RFU-NonSD/RFU-

SD/ODU connected to
IF1 port is offline.
l the logical board is not
configured for the RFU-
NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU
connected to IF1 port.
ACT1 On (green) l In a 1+1 protected

system, the first
microwave link is
working as the main link.
l In an unprotected
system, the first
microwave link has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected

system, the first
microwave link is
working as the standby
link.
l In an unprotected
system, the logical board
is not added for the
RFU-NonSD/RFU-
SD/ODU connected to
IF1 port.
LINK2 On (green) The second microwave link

is normal.
On (red) The second microwave link

is faulty.

Off l The RFU-NonSD/RFU-

SD/ODU connected to
IF2 port is offline.
l the logical board is not
configured for the RFU-
NonSD/RFU-SD/ODU
connected to IF2 port.
ACT2 On (green) l In a 1+1 protected

system, the second
microwave link is
working as the main link.
l In an unprotected
system, the second
microwave link has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected

system, the second
microwave link is
working as the standby
link.
l In an unprotected
system, the logical board
is not added for the
RFU-NonSD/RFU-
SD/ODU connected to
IF2 port.
Ports
Table 2-8 Description of the ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF1 IF port TNC IF jumper
IF2 IF port TNC IF jumper
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation
guidance label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.

The operation warning label instructs you to connect the IF cable to the RFU-NonSD/RFU-
SD/ODU before you connect it to the IDU.
2.3.6 Valid Slots

An ISM6 board can be inserted in any slot 1 to 6. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
NOTE
An IDU can house a maximum of five ISM6 boards when being used with an ODU.
An IDU can house a maximum of three ISM6 boards when being used with an RFU.
Figure 2-10 Slots for ISM6 boards in a chassis
Slot 7
Slot 11 Slot 5 (ISM6) Slot 6 (ISM6)

(FAN)
Slot 3 (ISM6) Slot 4 (ISM6)
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS when ISM6 boards
are used with an ODU.
l IF1 port: The logical slot ID of an ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of the connected
IF board plus 20.
l IF2 port: The logical slot ID of an ODU is equal to the logical slot ID of the connected
IF board plus 40.
NOTE
When an RFU is used, the RFU does not have a corresponding physical slot and the logical slot ID of the
RFU is the same as that of the ODU on the NMS.
Figure 2-11 Logical slots of ISM6 boards on the NMS (Working with an ODU)
Slot 25 (RFU/RFU- Slot 45 (RFU/RFU- Slot 26 (RFU/RFU- Slot 46 (RFU/RFU-
SD/ODU) SD/ODU) SD/ODU) SD/ODU)
Slot 9 Slot 7 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 19
Slot 11 Slot 5 (ISM6) Slot 6 (ISM6)

(FAN)

Table 2-9 Slot allocation

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 1 and 2
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure an inter-board XPIC 1+1 IF protection group.
Specifically, slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
When ISM6 boards are used with an RFU, ISM6 boards cannot be inserted into slots at the
same layer. Slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, and slots 5 and 6 are at the same layer.
When ISM6 boards are used with an RFU, if an ISM6 board and a service board with optical
modules are inserted into slots at the same layer, the ISM6 board must be inserted on the right
side of the service board.
2.3.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes board specifications, including running modes, radio working modes,
IF performance, modem performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
Running Modes
ISM6 boards can work in IS6, IS3 or IS2 mode.
Except for the preceding three running modes, ISM6 also supports the LH ACCP mode when
working with RFUs.
Table 2-10 Application scenarios of each running mode

Running Mode Application Scenario
IS6 mode IS6 mode provides high bandwidth and large capacity, which is the
default mode. In this mode, the modulation schemes
QPSK-4096QAM and the two extended modulation schemes QPSK
Strong and 16QAM Strong are supported. The 112 MHz channel
spacing is supported, and in this channel spacing, the modulation
schemes QPSK-512QAM are supported.
The XMC-3 ODU supports the IS6 mode.
IS3 mode IS3 mode provides large capacity. In this mode, the modulation
schemes QPSK-2048QAM and the four extended modulation
schemes QPSK Strong, 16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light, and
1024QAM Light are supported, among which 2048QAM is used
only when AM is enabled. ISM6 boards can interconnect only with
ISV3 boards or the RTN 905.
ISM6 boards working in IS3 mode support the same radio working
modes as ISV3 boards but do not support a 3.5 MHz channel
spacing. For information about the supported radio working modes,
see ISV3 Technical Specifications.
ISM6 boards in IS3 mode can work with the XMC-2, XMC-2H,
and XMC-3 ODU.

Running Mode Application Scenario
IS2 mode IS2 mode provides standard capacity. In this mode, the modulation
schemes QPSK-256QAM are supported. ISM6 boards can
interconnect only with ISU2/ISX2 boards.
l ISM6 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC disabled
support the same radio working modes as ISU2 boards, but do
not support the 50M channel spacing. For information about the
supported radio working modes, see ISU2 Technical
Specifications.
l ISM6 boards working in IS2 mode and with XPIC enabled
support the same radio working modes as ISX2 boards, but do
not support the 50M channel spacing. For information about the
supported radio working modes, see ISX2 Technical
Specifications.
ISM6 boards in IS2 mode can work with the XMC-2 ODU.
LH ACCP mode In LH ACCP mode, supports the QPSK-1024QAM modulation

schemes and three extended modulation schemes: QPSK Strong,
16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light.
In LH ACCP mode, ISM6 works with RFUs.
Table 2-11 Highest-order modulation scheme supported by the IS6 mode (XPIC disabled, the XMC-3 ODU used)
Frequency Maximum Modulation @ Channel Spacing
band
7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz 40 MHz 56 MHz 112 MHz
7/8 GHz 1024QAM 2048QAM 4096QAM 4096QAM 4096QAM N/A
13/15/18/23/ 1024QAM 2048QAM 4096QAMb 4096QAMb 4096QAMb N/A

26 GHz
28/38 GHz 1024QAM 2048QAMa 2048QAMa 2048QAMa 2048QAMa N/A
32 GHz 1024QAM 2048QAMa 2048QAMa 2048QAMa 2048QAMa 512QAM
NOTE
l a: At the 38GHz, 28 GHz or 32 GHz frequency band, 2048QAM is supported only when AM is enabled and ATPC is
disabled.
l b: The 4096QAM modulation scheme is supported only when AM is enabled and ATPC is disabled. When the 4096QAM
modulation scheme is used, IF cables must meet the following conditions:
l For 26 GHz frequency band: an IF cable must be shorter than 30 m or longer than 40 m when using 28 MHz channel
spacing; an IF cable must be shorter than 30 m or longer than 80 m when using 40/56 MHz channel spacing.
l For 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz frequency bands, an IF cable must be shorter than 30 m or longer than 80 m when using 40/56
MHz channel spacing.

Table 2-12 Highest-order modulation scheme supported by the IS6 mode (XPIC enabled, the XMC-3 ODU used)
Frequency Maximum Modulation @ Channel Spacing
band
7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz 40 MHz 56 MHz 112 MHz
13/15/18/23/ 512QAM 1024QAM 2048QAM 2048QAM 2048QAM N/A

26 GHz
32 GHz 512QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM 512QAM
NOTE
The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 950A comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
14/28/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 13.75/27.5/55 MHz apply to the 18 GHz
frequency band.
SDH microwave work mode (IS6-mode)
Table 2-13 SDH microwave work mode (IS6-mode)

Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

NOTE
In IS6 running mode and SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function
is enabled or disabled.
Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6-mode, E1+Ethernet)
Table 2-14 Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6 mode, E1 + Ethernet, non-XPIC)
(MHz) E1s in Native With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Ethernet Frame Frame Frame
Microwave Throughpu Header Header Header
t (Mbit/s) Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 16 10 to 25 10 to 32
7 16QAM 8 17 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 41 18 to 53
Strong


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 32 21 to 49 21 to 63
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 39 26 to 61 26 to 78
7 64QAM 15 32 to 40 32 to 50 33 to 77 33 to 98
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 38 to 58 38 to 90 39 to 116
7 256QAM 20 43 to 54 43 to 66 43 to 102 44 to 131
7 512QAM 22 47 to 60 47 to 73 48 to 113 49 to 145
7 1024QAM 25 51 to 65 52 to 80 52 to 123 53 to 158
14 (13.75) QPSK Strong 8 17 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 41 18 to 53
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 21 to 32 21 to 49 21 to 64
14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 35 to 44 35 to 54 36 to 84 36 to 108

Strong
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 41 to 52 42 to 64 42 to 99 43 to 127
14 (13.75) 32QAM 25 52 to 66 52 to 80 53 to 124 54 to 159
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 66 to 101 66 to 156 68 to 200
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 98 78 to 120 79 to 185 80 to 237
14 (13.75) 256QAM 43 89 to 113 90 to 138 91 to 214 93 to 274
14 (13.75) 512QAM 47 99 to 125 99 to 153 101 to 236 103 to 303
14 (13.75) 1024QAM 50 104 to 132 105 to 162 106 to 250 109 to 321
14 (13.75) 2048QAM 55 115 to 146 116 to 179 118 to 276 120 to 354
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 42 to 66 43 to 101 44 to 130
28 (27.5) 16QAM 35 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 175 76 to 225

Strong
28 (27.5) 16QAM 41 86 to 109 86 to 133 87 to 205 89 to 263
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 109 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 337
28 (27.5) 64QAM 65 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 416
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 161 to 248 163 to 383 167 to 492


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 185 to 234 186 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 207 to 262 208 to 320 211 to 494 215 to 635
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 219 to 277 220 to 339 223 to 523 228 to 672
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 75 242 to 306 244 to 374 247 to 578 251 to 742
28 (27.5) 4096QAM 75 258 to 327 260 to 400 263 to 617 268 to 792
56 (55) QPSK Strong 35 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 226
56 (55) QPSK 41 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 264
56 (55) 16QAM 71 148 to 188 149 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 456
Strong
56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 532
56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 221 to 519 226 to 666
56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 838
56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 500 330 to 772 336 to 991
56 (55) 256QAM 75 373 to 473 376 to 578 381 to 891 388 to 1145
56 (55) 512QAM 75 417 to 528 420 to 645 425 to 996 433 to 1278
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 450 to 571 454 to 698 460 to 1076 468 to 1382
56 (55) 2048QAM 75 502 to 636 506 to 777 512 to 1199 522 to 1539
56 (55) 4096QAM 75 535 to 678 540 to 829 546 to 1280 557 to 1643
40 QPSK 28 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 179
40 16QAM 48 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 309

Strong
40 16QAM 56 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 360
40 32QAM 72 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 460
40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
40 128QAM 75 219 to 277 221 to 339 223 to 524 228 to 672
40 256QAM 75 253 to 320 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 776


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
40 512QAM 75 282 to 358 285 to 438 288 to 675 294 to 867
40 1024QAM 75 304 to 386 307 to 472 311 to 728 317 to 934
40 2048QAM 75 330 to 418 332 to 511 337 to 788 343 to 1012
40 4096QAM 75 344 to 436 347 to 533 351 to 823 358 to 1056
112 QPSK 75 173 to 219 174 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 531
112 16QAM 75 298 to 377 300 to 461 304 to 712 310 to 914
Strong
112 16QAM 75 348 to 441 351 to 539 355 to 831 362 to 1067
112 32QAM 75 435 to 551 439 to 674 444 to 1040 453 to 1336
112 64QAM 75 548 to 694 552 to 848 559 to 1309 570 to 1680
112 128QAM 75 647 to 820 653 to 1003 661 to 1547 673 to 1987
112 256QAM 75 747 to 947 753 to 1158 763 to 1786 777 to 2293
112 512QAM 75 835 to 1058 841 to 1293 852 to 1995 868 to 2415
Table 2-15 Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6 mode, E1 + Ethernet, XPIC)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 4 10 to 12 10 to 15 10 to 24 10 to 31
7 16QAM 8 16 to 21 17 to 26 17 to 40 17 to 51
Strong
7 16QAM 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 20 to 61
7 32QAM 11 24 to 31 25 to 38 25 to 59 25 to 76
7 64QAM 15 31 to 39 31 to 48 32 to 74 32 to 96


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 128QAM 17 36 to 46 37 to 56 37 to 87 38 to 112
7 256QAM 20 42 to 53 42 to 65 43 to 101 44 to 130
7 512QAM 22 47 to 60 47 to 73 48 to 113 49 to 145
14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 25 20 to 31 20 to 48 21 to 62
14 (13.75) 16QAM 16 34 to 43 34 to 53 35 to 82 35 to 105

Strong
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 40 to 51 40 to 62 41 to 96 42 to 124
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 64 51 to 78 51 to 120 52 to 155
14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 63 to 80 64 to 98 64 to 152 66 to 195
14 (13.75) 128QAM 36 75 to 95 75 to 116 76 to 179 78 to 231
14 (13.75) 256QAM 41 86 to 109 86 to 133 87 to 205 89 to 263
14 (13.75) 512QAM 46 96 to 121 96 to 148 98 to 229 100 to 294
14 (13.75) 1024QAM 50 104 to 132 105 to 162 106 to 250 109 to 321
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 42 to 54 42 to 66 43 to 101 44 to 130
28 (27.5) 16QAM 35 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 175 76 to 225

Strong
28 (27.5) 16QAM 41 86 to 109 86 to 133 87 to 205 89 to 263
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 109 to 139 110 to 170 112 to 262 114 to 337
28 (27.5) 64QAM 65 135 to 172 136 to 210 138 to 324 141 to 416
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 203 161 to 248 163 to 383 167 to 492
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 184 to 233 185 to 284 187 to 439 191 to 564
28 (27.5) 512QAM 75 198 to 251 200 to 307 202 to 474 206 to 609
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 75 216 to 274 218 to 335 221 to 517 225 to 664
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 75 227 to 287 228 to 351 231 to 542 236 to 696
56 (55) QPSK Strong 35 73 to 93 74 to 114 75 to 176 76 to 226


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 (55) QPSK 41 86 to 109 87 to 133 88 to 206 89 to 264
56 (55) 16QAM 71 148 to 188 149 to 230 151 to 355 154 to 456
Strong
56 (55) 16QAM 75 173 to 220 175 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 532
56 (55) 32QAM 75 217 to 275 219 to 336 221 to 519 226 to 666
56 (55) 64QAM 75 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 838
56 (55) 128QAM 75 323 to 409 326 to 500 330 to 772 336 to 991
56 (55) 256QAM 75 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1132
56 (55) 512QAM 75 400 to 507 403 to 619 408 to 956 416 to 1227
56 (55) 1024QAM 75 436 to 552 439 to 675 445 to 1041 453 to 1337
56 (55) 2048QAM 75 456 to 578 460 to 707 466 to 1091 475 to 1401
40 QPSK 28 58 to 74 58 to 90 59 to 139 60 to 179
40 16QAM 48 100 to 127 101 to 156 102 to 240 104 to 309

Strong
40 16QAM 56 117 to 149 118 to 182 120 to 281 122 to 360
40 32QAM 72 150 to 190 151 to 232 153 to 359 156 to 460
40 64QAM 75 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
40 128QAM 75 219 to 277 221 to 339 223 to 524 228 to 672
40 256QAM 75 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 770
40 512QAM 75 271 to 344 273 to 420 277 to 648 282 to 832
40 1024QAM 75 295 to 374 298 to 458 302 to 706 307 to 907
40 2048QAM 75 326 to 413 328 to 505 333 to 779 339 to 1000
112 QPSK 75 172 to 219 174 to 268 175 to 414 178 to 531
112 16QAM 75 297 to 377 300 to 461 302 to 712 306 to 914
Strong
112 16QAM 75 347 to 441 351 to 539 352 to 831 357 to 1067


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
112 32QAM 75 434 to 551 439 to 674 441 to 1040 447 to 1336
112 64QAM 75 546 to 694 552 to 848 554 to 1309 562 to 1680
112 128QAM 75 646 to 820 653 to 1003 656 to 1547 665 to 1987
112 256QAM 75 745 to 947 753 to 1158 757 to 1786 768 to 2293
112 512QAM 75 832 to 1058 841 to 1293 845 to 1995 857 to 2415
Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6-mode, STM-1+Ethernet)
Table 2-16 Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6 mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, non-XPIC)
Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Native With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 161 to 248 163 to 383 167 to 492
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 185 to 234 186 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 207 to 262 208 to 320 211 to 494 215 to 635
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 219 to 277 220 to 339 223 to 523 228 to 672
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 1 242 to 306 244 to 374 247 to 578 251 to 742
28 (27.5) 4096QAM 1 258 to 327 260 to 400 263 to 617 268 to 792
56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 532
56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 221 to 519 226 to 666
56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 838
56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 500 330 to 772 336 to 991
56 (55) 256QAM 1 373 to 473 376 to 578 381 to 891 388 to 1145
56 (55) 512QAM 1 417 to 528 420 to 645 425 to 996 433 to 1278
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 450 to 571 454 to 698 460 to 1076 468 to 1382


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 (55) 2048QAM 1 502 to 636 506 to 777 512 to 1199 522 to 1539
56 (55) 4096QAM 1 535 to 678 540 to 829 546 to 1280 557 to 1643
40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
40 128QAM 1 219 to 277 221 to 339 223 to 524 228 to 672
40 256QAM 1 253 to 320 255 to 392 258 to 605 263 to 776
40 512QAM 1 282 to 358 285 to 438 288 to 675 294 to 867
40 1024QAM 1 304 to 386 307 to 472 311 to 728 317 to 934
40 2048QAM 1 330 to 418 332 to 511 337 to 788 343 to 1012
40 4096QAM 1 344 to 436 347 to 533 351 to 823 358 to 1056
112 QPSK 1 173 to 219 174 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 531
112 16QAM 1 298 to 377 300 to 461 304 to 712 310 to 914
Strong
112 16QAM 1 348 to 441 351 to 539 355 to 831 362 to 1067
112 32QAM 1 435 to 551 439 to 674 444 to 1040 453 to 1336
112 64QAM 1 548 to 694 552 to 848 559 to 1309 570 to 1680
112 128QAM 1 647 to 820 653 to 1003 661 to 1547 673 to 1987
112 256QAM 1 747 to 947 753 to 1158 763 to 1786 777 to 2293
112 512QAM 1 835 to 1058 841 to 1293 852 to 1995 868 to 2415
Table 2-17 Integrated IP microwave work mode (IS6 mode, STM-1 + Ethernet, XPIC)
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 160 to 203 161 to 248 163 to 383 167 to 492
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 184 to 233 185 to 284 187 to 439 191 to 564


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 512QAM 1 198 to 251 200 to 307 202 to 474 206 to 609
28 (27.5) 1024QAM 1 216 to 274 218 to 335 221 to 517 225 to 664
28 (27.5) 2048QAM 1 227 to 287 228 to 351 231 to 542 236 to 696
56 (55) 16QAM 1 173 to 220 175 to 268 177 to 414 180 to 532
56 (55) 32QAM 1 217 to 275 219 to 336 221 to 519 226 to 666
56 (55) 64QAM 1 273 to 346 275 to 423 279 to 653 284 to 838
56 (55) 128QAM 1 323 to 409 326 to 500 330 to 772 336 to 991
56 (55) 256QAM 1 369 to 467 372 to 571 376 to 882 384 to 1132
56 (55) 512QAM 1 400 to 507 403 to 619 408 to 956 416 to 1227
56 (55) 1024QAM 1 436 to 552 439 to 675 445 to 1041 453 to 1337
56 (55) 2048QAM 1 456 to 578 460 to 707 466 to 1091 475 to 1401
40 64QAM 1 185 to 235 187 to 287 189 to 443 192 to 568
40 128QAM 1 219 to 277 221 to 339 223 to 524 228 to 672
40 256QAM 1 251 to 318 253 to 389 256 to 600 261 to 770
40 512QAM 1 271 to 344 273 to 420 277 to 648 282 to 832
40 1024QAM 1 295 to 374 298 to 458 302 to 706 307 to 907
40 2048QAM 1 326 to 413 328 to 505 333 to 779 339 to 1000
112 QPSK 1 172 to 219 174 to 268 175 to 414 178 to 531
112 16QAM 1 297 to 377 300 to 461 302 to 712 306 to 914
Strong
112 16QAM 1 347 to 441 351 to 539 352 to 831 357 to 1067
112 32QAM 1 434 to 551 439 to 674 441 to 1040 447 to 1336
112 64QAM 1 546 to 694 552 to 848 554 to 1309 562 to 1680
112 128QAM 1 646 to 820 653 to 1003 656 to 1547 665 to 1987
112 256QAM 1 745 to 947 753 to 1158 757 to 1786 768 to 2293
112 512QAM 1 832 to 1058 841 to 1293 845 to 1995 857 to 2415

NOTE
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518
bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64
bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with
a length ranging from 70 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with
a length ranging from 94 bytes to 1518 bytes
bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface
capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
Service capacity in SDH microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Table 2-18 Service capacity in SDH microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Service Capacity
28 (27.5) 128QAM STM-1
56 (55) 128QAM 2 x STM-1

NOTE
The SDH microwave mode supported by the equipment remains the same no matter whether XPIC is enabled or disabled.
Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)
Table 2-19 Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC disabled)
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 75 (1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 256QAM 75 (1) 178 to 225 179 to 275 181 to 389 185 to 546
28 512QAM 75 (1) 190 to 240 191 to 294 194 to 415 197 to 583
28 512QAM 75 (1) 202 to 256 203 to 313 206 to 441 210 to 620
Light
28 1024QAM 75 (1) 213 to 270 215 to 330 217 to 466 221 to 654
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 257 to 325 259 to 398 262 to 561 267 to 788
40 512QAM 75 (1) 274 to 347 276 to 424 280 to 599 285 to 841
40 512QAM 75 (1) 291 to 369 293 to 451 297 to 636 303 to 893
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 307 to 389 309 to 475 313 to 671 319 to 941
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 363 to 460 366 to 562 370 to 794 377 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 392 to 497 396 to 608 401 to 858 408 to 1000


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 512QAM 75 (2) 416 to 527 420 to 645 425 to 910 433 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 440 to 558 444 to 682 450 to 963 458 to 1000
Table 2-20 Service capacity in integrated IP radio mode (LH ACCP mode, XPIC enabled)
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 QPSK 18 41 to 51 41 to 63 41 to 89 42 to 125
28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

Strong
28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253
28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324
28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389
28 128QAM 74 (1) 157 to 198 158 to 243 160 to 342 163 to 481
28 256QAM 75 (1) 176 to 224 178 to 273 180 to 386 183 to 542
28 512QAM 75 (1) 182 to 231 184 to 282 186 to 398 189 to 559
28 512QAM 75 (1) 194 to 246 195 to 300 198 to 424 201 to 595
Light
40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183
40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

Strong
40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367
40 32QAM 74 (1) 158 to 200 159 to 245 161 to 345 164 to 485


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
40 64QAM 75 (1) 188 to 238 189 to 291 192 to 411 195 to 577
40 128QAM 75 (1) 222 to 282 224 to 344 227 to 486 231 to 682
40 256QAM 75 (1) 255 to 323 257 to 395 260 to 557 265 to 782
40 512QAM 75 (1) 263 to 333 265 to 407 268 to 575 273 to 807
40 512QAM 75 (1) 279 to 354 282 to 433 285 to 611 291 to 858
Light
40 1024QAM 75 (1) 298 to 377 300 to 461 304 to 651 310 to 914
56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260
56 16QAM 69 146 to 185 147 to 226 149 to 320 152 to 449

Strong
56 16QAM 75 (1) 171 to 216 172 to 264 174 to 373 177 to 524
56 32QAM 75 (1) 214 to 271 216 to 331 218 to 468 222 to 657
56 64QAM 75 (1) 270 to 343 272 to 419 276 to 591 281 to 830
56 128QAM 75 (2) 318 to 403 321 to 493 325 to 695 331 to 976
56 256QAM 75 (2) 359 to 455 362 to 556 366 to 785 373 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 377 to 477 380 to 584 385 to 824 392 to 1000
56 512QAM 75 (2) 400 to 506 403 to 619 408 to 874 416 to 1000
Light
56 1024QAM 75 (2) 426 to 540 429 to 660 435 to 931 443 to 1000

NOTE
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes
to 1518 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): UDP messages, C-tagged Ethernet frames with a
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): UDP messages, S-tagged Ethernet frames with a
bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can
be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 2-21 IF performance

Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5
Interface impedance (ohm) 50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of Modems
Table 2-22 Baseband signal processing performance of modems

Item Performance
Encoding mode Low-density parity check (LDPC) encoding
Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals

Mechanical Behaviors and Power Consumption
Table 2-23 Mechanical behaviors and power consumption

Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Weight 0.65 kg
Power consumption l Working with ODU: < 40 W

l Working with RFU: < 45 W
2.4 RFU
A radio frequency unit (RFU) is an RF transceiver mainly used to convert the frequency and
amplify the power of signals.
RFUs are available in two types:
l RFU-SD: supports reception SD and IF combination.

l RFU-NonSD: does not support reception SD.
2.4.1 Appearance
An RFU is used outdoors and has an integrated structure.
Mechanical specifications of an RFU-SD and an RFU-NonSD are the same. Figure 2-12
shows the appearance of an RFU.
NOTE
An RFU-NonSD has an SD port flange, which does not support SD signal reception and combination.
Figure 2-12 Appearance of an RFU

Table 2-24 Appearance description

Item Description
Handle A handle helps engineers hold an RFU and facilitates RFU's

installation.
Guide pin A guide pin is fit into the guide trough on the branching unit to
facilitate positioning and installation of an RFU.
RF port An RF port is connected to the corresponding port on the branching

unit to receive and transmit RF signals.
Captive screw A captive screw fastens an RFU.
Ventilation valve A ventilation valve keeps pressure the same inside and outside an
RFU, preventing explosion. In addition, a ventilation valve prevents
moisture.
RSSI port An RSSI port is used to test RSSI voltage.
IF port An IF port is connected to an IDU through IF cables.
Ground screw A ground screw is connected to a protection ground cable.

A radio frequency unit (RFU) is mainly used to convert the frequency and amplify the power
of signals.
An RFU performs the following functions:
l Up converts upstream IF signals into RF signals to be transmitted and amplifies the RF
signals.
l Down converts the received RF signals into downstream IF signals and amplifies the IF
signals.
l Separates and combines upstream IF signals, downstream IF signals, upstream O&M
signals, downstream O&M signals, and -48 V power in IF cables.
l Performs control and monitoring functions.
An RFU supports the following features:
l Separate setting of the transmit frequency and receive frequency to adapt to various
channel spacing settings, so that one frequency band requires only two types of RFUs
(TX high site and TX low site types)
l Receiving of space diversity (SD) signals and IF combination (only by RFU-SD models)
l Adaptive modulation
l Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) and remote transmission power control
(RTPC)
l Transmit power detection
l Receive power detection
l Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) used to indicate the current receive power
using voltage values

l Transmitter muting
l Temperature detection
2.4.3 Working Principles

For RFU-SD and RFU-NonSD models, signal processing is the same in the transmit direction
but are different in the receive direction.
Block Diagram
Figure 2-13 shows the block diagram of an RFU-SD.
NOTE
An RFU-NonSD processes signals in a similar way as an RFU-SD except for that the RFU-NonSD does
not have an SD receiver and IF combination module.
Figure 2-13 Block diagram of an RFU-SD

RFU-SD
Tx IF RF Tx
Up-conversion AMP
O&M
uplink
CTRL
O&M
downlink
IF Cable Synthesizers
port
DC PWR
RF Rx-Main
Down-conversion LNA
SD receiver and IF
Rx IF
combination module
IF combiner
Multiplexer Rx-SD
RF
Down-conversion LNA
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

The multiplexer splits the signal from the IF cable into a 350 MHz IF signal, a 5.5 MHz O&M
uplink signal, and a -48 V DC power signal.
In the transmit direction, an RFU-SD processes signals as follows:
1. After the up-conversion, filtering, and amplification are completed, the IF signal is
converted into the RF signal and is sent to the amplifier unit (AMP).
2. The AMP amplifies the RF signal and outputted from the Tx port.The output power of
the signal can be controlled by the IDU software.

The O&M uplink signal is a 5.5 MHz ASK-modulated signal and is demodulated in the
CTRL control unit.
The -48 V DC power signal is sent to the PWR power unit where the secondary power supply
of a different voltage is generated and provided to the modules of the RFU.
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

In the receive direction, an RFU-SD processes signals as follows:
1. The RF signal received by a main antenna is input to the RFU through the Rx-Main port,
and that received by an SD antenna is input to the RFU through the Rx-SD port.
2. The RF signal is amplified in the low noise amplifier (LNA). Through the down-
conversion, filtering, and amplification, the RF signal is converted into a 140 MHz IF
signal.
3. The IF combiner performs adaptive signal processing for the main and SD IF signals,
combines them to a channel of IF signals, and send them to the multiplexer.
In the receive direction, an RFU-NonSD processes signals as follows:
1. The RF signal received by a main antenna is input to the RFU through the Rx-Main port.
2. The RF signal is amplified in the low noise amplifier (LNA). Through the down-
conversion, filtering, and amplification, the RF signal is converted into a 140 MHz IF
signal, and send them to the multiplexer.
The O&M downlink signal is modulated under the ASK mode in the CTRL unit. The 10 MHz
signal is generated through the modulation and sent to the multiplexer. The CTRL unit also
detects the receive signal level through the RSSI detection circuit and provides the RSSI
interface.
The IF signal and the O&M downlink signal are combined in the multiplexer and sent to the
IDU through the IF cable.
2.4.4 Installation Mode

An RFU is directly installed to the corresponding port on the branching unit.
Figure 2-14 Installation mode of RFUs

2.4.5 Ports
An RFU provides the RF port, IF port, RSSI port, and ground screw.
Figure 2-15 shows the ports on the RFU (take the RFU-SD as an example).
Figure 2-15 Ports on an RFU
Table 2-25 describes the ports on an RFU.
Table 2-25 Port description

Port Name Description Connector Type Remarks
TX RF transmit port 153IEC-R70 (L6/U6 An RF port is

GHz) connected to the
Main RX RF receive port corresponding port
153IEC-R84 (7/8
(main) on the branching
GHz)
SD RX RF receive port (SD) unit.
153IEC-R120 (11
NOTE GHz)
An RFU-NonSD has
an SD port flange,
which does not
support SD signal
reception and
combination.
IF IF port Type-N (female) An IF port is

connected to an IF
cable.

Port Name Description Connector Type Remarks
RSSI RSSI port BNC type, two pins, The received signal
(female) strength can be
calculated based on
the voltage that is
measured at this port
using a multimeter.
PGND Ground screw M5 screw A ground screw is

connected to a
protection ground
cable.
As shown in Figure 2-15, an RFU provides two types of RSSI ports: RSSI (main) and RSSI
(SD).
l For an RFU-SD, the RSSI (main) port is used to measure the level of the main received
signals and the RSSI (SD) port is used to measure the level of the SD received signals.
l For an RFU-NonSD, only the RSSI (main) port is used to measure the level of received
signals.
Figure 2-16 RSSI port
2.4.6 Labels
The following labels are attached to an RFU: nameplate label, bar code, radiation label, and
overtemperature label.

Nameplate Label
Figure 2-17 Nameplate label of an RFU
Table 2-26 Meanings of the parameters in a nameplate label

Label Example of the Label Content Parameter Meaning
Informati
on
RFU name (1): RFU type Type of the RFU
(2): frequency band Operating frequency band of

the RFU (GHz)
(3): diversity type l SD: space diversity (SD)

supported
l NonSD: SD not
supported
(4): component name A radio frequency unit

(RFU)
Part - Part number of the RFU

number
(ITEM)
Operating - l TX: transmit frequency

frequency range
l RX: receive frequency
range
TX - l High Site: TX high site

high/low l Low Site: TX low site
site
CMIIT ID - - ID of radio transmission

equipment type approval
certificate (in China)

Bar Code, Radiation Label, and Overtemperature Label
Table 2-27 Bar code, radiation label, and overtemperature label

Label Name Appearance Meaning
Bar code Bar code of an RFU's serial number,

which is used to uniquely identify
each RFU
Radiation Used to warn users that

label electromagnetic radiation is generated
while the device is working.
Overtemperatu Used to warn users that high

re label temperature conditions may occur
while the device is working and
proper protection measures should be
taken.

This section describes the RFU specifications, including frequency information, modulation
schemes, transceiver performance, IF performance, mechanical behavior, and power
consumption.
Frequency Information
Table 2-28 Operating frequency band (XMC-LH RFU)

Operating Frequency Range (GHz)
Frequency Band
Transmit Frequency of a TX Transmit Frequency of a TX
High Site (Receive Low Site (Receive Frequency
Frequency of a TX Low Site) of a TX High Site)
L6 GHz 6.175 to 6.425 5.925 to 6.173
U6 GHz 6.765 to 7.125 6.425 to 6.785
7 GHz 7.275 to 7.897 7.093 to 7.707
8 GHz 8.0165 to 8.497 7.725 to 8.377
11 GHz 11.199 to 11.745 10.675 to 11.215

NOTE
l Frequency ranges shown in the table are Tx/Rx signal frequencies lower / upper limits, that is, not
the channel center frequencies. The minimum central frequency is at least half of the channel
spacing higher than the minimum transmit frequency. The maximum central frequency is at least
half of the channel spacing lower than the maximum transmit frequency.
l The frequencies of an RFU's transmitter and receiver are separately set and they support multiple
T/R spacing values. Therefore, the transmit frequency ranges of the TX high and TX low sites are
not strictly symmetrical.
Typical T/R spacings include:
l L6 GHz frequency band: 252.04 MHz
l U6 GHz frequency band: 340 MHz
l 7GHz frequency band: 154 MHz, 161 MHz, 168 MHz, 196 MHz, 245 MHz
l 8GHz frequency band: 208 MHz, 266 MHz, 310 MHz, 311.32 MHz
l 11GHz frequency band: 490 MHz, 530 MHz
Modulation Schemes
Table 2-29 Modulation scheme (XMC-LH RFU)
Item Performance
Modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
Channel 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

spacing 28/56 MHz (L6/7 GHz)
NOTE
Cooperated with IF boards, RFUs also support QPSK Strong, 16QAM Strong, and 512QAM Light
working modes. Strong and light indicate FEC coding strength. Strong FEC improves receiver
sensitivity by increasing error-correcting codes. Light FEC expands service capacity by reducing error-
correcting codes.
Transceiver Performance
NOTE
The allowed maximum difference between the actual transmit power of an RFU and the preset value on
the NMS is ±2 dB.
If the receive power of an RFU is in the range from –70 dBm to –30 dBm, the allowed maximum
difference between the actual receive power and the preset value on the NMS is ±2 dB.
Table 2-30 Transceiver performance (XMC-LH RFU)
Item Performance

32QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)

Item Performance

32QAM
@L6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@U6 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@7 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@8 GHz 31.5 31.5 29.5 27.5
@11 GHz 29.5 29.5 27.5 26.5
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)
@L6 GHz 6
@U6 GHz 6
@7 GHz 6
@8 GHz 6
@11 GHz 6
Nominal -20 -25

maximum
receive power
(dBm)
Frequency ±5
stability (ppm)
NOTE
When the T/R spacing is not a integer in unit of MHz, the frequency accuracy is not ±5 ppm but meets
the requirement of the ETSI.
IF Performance
Table 2-31 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5

Item Performance
Interface impedance (ohm) 50
Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 2-32 Mechanical behavior and power consumption (XMC-LH RFU)

Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x 228 mm x 228 mm x 91 mm

D)
Weight ≤ 5.5 kg
Power -48 V (–36 V to –60 V) DC
Power consumption ≤ 50 W (RFU-SD)

≤ 45 W (RFU-NonSD)
2.5 Branching Unit

A branching unit is a radio frequency (RF) divider/combiner.
Branching units are available in BU-SD and BU-NonSD models, which apply to RFU-SDs
and RFU-NonSDs respectively.
2.5.1 Appearance
In the split long haul solution, an outdoor BU uses an integrated structure.
This section uses a four-port branching unit as an example. A three- or two-port branching
unit has a similar appearance but fewer RFU ports.

Branching Unit
Figure 2-18 Appearance of a branching unit (4+0)
Table 2-33 Appearance description (4+0)

Item Description
RFU port A branching unit provides four RFU ports so that RFUs can
mount to it.
Main antenna port The main antenna port is connected to the main antenna.
Main cascade port The main cascade port is connected to the main antenna
port on the secondary branching unit
SD antenna port (available The SD antenna port is connected to the SD antenna.

only on BU-SD models)
SD cascade port (available The SD cascade port is connected to the SD antenna port on
only on BU-SD models) the secondary branching unit
Lifting eye The lifting eye is used to tie with the lifting sling.
Bracket and hold hoop The bracket and hold hoop fix a branching unit onto a pole.
NOTE
When two branching units are cascaded, the branching unit that is directly connected to an antenna is
called the main branching unit and the other one that is not directly connected to an antenna is called the
secondary branching unit.

Mapping Loads
When an RFU port or an antenna/cascade port on a branching unit is not used, install a
mapping load onto the port to prevent signal reflection and provide waterproof and dustproof
functions. Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20 show the appearance of two types of load.
Figure 2-19 Load for an RFU port
Figure 2-20 Load for an antenna/cascade port

A branching unit combines and divides RF signals, and performs duplex isolation for received
and transmitted signals.
A branching unit performs the following functions:
l In the transmit direction, combines RF signals from four RFU ports and cascade ports (if
there are signals) into one signal and send the signal to the antenna.
l In the receive direction, divides the RF signal received from the antenna into signals
based on channels and sends these signals to corresponding RFU ports and cascade ports
(if there are cascade signals).

Figure 2-21 Combining and dividing signals (4+0)
2.5.3 Working Principles

A branching unit performs duplex isolation and signal combination and division using
circulators and filters.
A branching unit provides four tributary ports, one group of antenna ports, and one group of
cascade ports. The signals are processed in a branching unit as follows:
l In the transmit direction, four channels of tributary and cascade signals are combined by
circulators after being filtered and then sent out through the antenna port.
l In the receive direction, the RF signals received at the antenna port are divided by
circulators and signals that match corresponding filters of tributary channels are sent out
through mapping tributary ports. Signals that do not find matching filters continue to be
transmitted. When there are cascade signals, the cascade signals are finally sent out
through the cascade port as they cannot match the tributary filters of the main branching
unit.
NOTE
The design of a branching unit is optimized so that all channels are attenuated equally. Figure 2-22
shows the functional block diagram of a branching unit functioning as the TX low site. The channel
numbers for a branching unit functioning as the TX high site are the opposite (that is, ch4, ch3, ch2, and
ch1).

Figure 2-22 Block diagram of a BU (4+0)

Braching unit without SD Braching unit with SD
Ch 1
Main
Antenna
Ch 2 antenna
Ch 3
Ch 1
Ch 4
Cascading
Cascading Ch 2
(main)
Ch 3
Ch 4
Diversity
antenna
Circulator
Cascading
Filter (SD)
Ch n Radio channel n
2.5.4 Installation Mode

A branching unit is installed separately from antennas and is installed directly to RFU.
Figure 2-23 and Figure 2-24 show a branching unit that is installed in typical scenarios.
l A branching unit is connected to the main antenna using flexible waveguides.
l In SD configuration, a branching unit is connected to SD antennas using elliptical
waveguides.
l Two cascaded branching units are connected using flexible waveguides.
NOTE
If a dual-polarized antenna is used, one branching unit is connected to each polarization direction.

Figure 2-23 Installing a single branching unit
Figure 2-24 Installing two branching units

2.5.5 Ports
A branching unit provides one group of RFU ports, one group of antenna ports, and one group
of cascade ports.
Figure 2-25 Ports on a branching unit (4+0)
Table 2-34 Port description (4+0)

Port Name Port Label Function Connector Type
RFU port 1 RFU Port1 A branching unit provides four 154IEC-UDR70 (L6/U6 GHz)
RFU ports so that RFUs can mount 154IEC-UBR84 (7/8 GHz)
RFU port 2 RFU Port2 to it.
154IEC-UBR120 (11 GHz)
RFU port 3 RFU Port3
RFU port 4 RFU Port4

Port Name Port Label Function Connector Type
Main antenna Main Antenna l On a main branching unit, it is 154IEC-UDR70 (L6/U6 GHz)
port connected to the main antenna. 154IEC-UBR84 (7/8 GHz)
l On a secondary branching unit, 154IEC-UBR100 (11 GHz)
it is connected to the main
cascade port on the main
branching unit.
SD antenna port SD Antenna l On a main branching unit, it is

(available only connected to the SD antenna.
on BU-SD l On a secondary branching unit,
models) it is connected to the SD
cascade port on the main
branching unit.
Main cascade Main Cascade The main cascade port is connected

port to the main antenna port on the
secondary BU.
SD cascade port SD Cascade The SD cascade port is connected

(available only to the SD antenna port on the
on BU-SD secondary BU.
models)
2.5.6 Labels
The nameplate label and port labels are attached to a branching unit to provide equipment and
port information.
Nameplate Label
Figure 2-26 Nameplate label of a branching unit (4+0)

Table 2-35 Meanings of the parameters in a nameplate label (4+0)

Informati
on
Component - A branching unit of outdoor

name type
Part (1): type of component B: branching unit

number
(2): application O: outdoor
(MODEL) scenario
(3): frequency band Operating working

frequency of a branching
unit (GHz), value range: L6/
U6/07/08/11
(4): channel spacing Channel spacing (MHz),

value range: 28, 40, 56
(5): channel C: adjacent channel co-

configuration polarized (ACCP)
application
(6): diversity type N: space diversity (SD) not

supported
S: SD supported
(7): number of Number of tributary

channels channels supported by a
single branching unit
Part - Type of a branching unit

number
(ITEM)
Part (1): frequency band Operating frequency band of

description a branching unit
(DEP) (2): channel spacing Channel spacing
(3): channel ACCP: ACCP application

configuration
(4): diversity type NonSD: SD not supported

SD: SD supported
(5): number of Number of tributary

channels channels supported by a
single branching unit
(6): TX high/low site High: TX high site

Low: TX low site


Informati
on
Bar code - Bar code for the serial

area number of the part, and QR
code indicating part number
and serial number
RFU-side Port Label

A channel label is attached above each RFU port to provide channel information.
Figure 2-27 Channel label (4+0)
RFU Port x: RFU port for channel x 28MHz: channel bandwidth of each channel, with other available
values 40 MHz and 56 MHz
Tx: central TX frequency of the channel Rx: central RX frequency of the channel
Antenna-side Port Label

Labels are attached to antenna ports and cascade ports in the bottom of a branching unit to
identify various ports.
Figure 2-28 Antenna label and cascade port label
Main Antenna: main antenna port Main Cascade: main cascade port
SD Antenna: SD antenna port (available only on BU- SD Cascade: SD cascade port (available only on BU-
SD models) NonSD models)


The technical specifications of a branching unit include insertion loss, mechanical behavior,
and power consumption.
Insertion Loss
NOTE
l Insertion loss data is provided by hop, including TX insertion loss and RX insertion loss.
l The BU performance provided in the following table applies to both adjacent channel configuration
and non-adjacent channel configuration.
Table 2-36 Insertion loss

Bandwidth (MHz)
single BU Two BUs
L6 GHz 28 5.7 7.6
56 5.3 7.2
U6 GHz 28 5.9 7.8
40 5.5 7.4
56 5.5 7.4
7 GHz 28 6.3 8.4
56 5.9 8
8 GHz 28 6.7 8.8
40 6.1 8.2
56 6.1 8.2
7&8 GHzc 28 6.7 8.8
56 6.1 8.2
11 GHz 28 7.1 9.4
40 6.5 8.8
56 6.5 8.8
NOTE
l a: The insertion loss per hop of a single BU for 3+0 BU and 2+0 BU is the same with the 4+0 BU.
l b: When two different or same BUs cascade, the insertion loss per hop is same.
l c: 7&8 GHz BUs are wideband BUs. They combine and split 7 GHz and 8 GHz RF signals.

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption
Table 2-37 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of a branching unit

Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x 400 mm x 700 mm x 400 mm

D)
Weight ≤ 40 kg
2.6 Antennas
The microwave device uses the parabolic antennas to transmit and receive electromagnetic
waves.
2.6.1 Device Type

Antennas are classified into two types, namely, the single-polarized antenna and dual-
polarized antenna.
NOTE
l By installation mode between the antenna and the transceiver, antennas are classified to direct-
mount antennas and separate-mount antennas. The Long haul microwave system supports only
separate-mount antennas.
l The feed boom in this topic is only for reference, please check the real feed boom.
l The single-polarized antenna transmits or receives electromagnetic waves in a specific
polarization direction. The single-polarized antenna provides a feed boom interface. The
feed boom interface can be set to be vertically polarized or horizontally polarized.
Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 show the feed booms of the single-polarized antennas.
Figure 2-29 Feed boom of the single-polarized antenna (diameter ≤ 1.8 m)

Figure 2-30 Feed boom of the single-polarized antenna (diameter > 1.8 m)
l The dual-polarized antenna transmits and receives horizontally-polarized and vertically-

polarized electromagnetic waves at the same time.
Figure 2-31 shows the feed booms of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna.
Figure 2-31 Feed boom of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna

2.6.2 Functions
The microwave antenna is used to convert between the RF signals transmitted from the
Branching unit and electromagnetic waves radiated in the air.
l In the TX direction, the antenna converts the RF signals transmitted from the Branching
unit into directional electromagnetic waves and then radiates electromagnetic waves in
the air.
l In the RX direction, the antenna receives and assembles electromagnetic waves from the
air, converts electromagnetic waves into the RF signals, and then transmits the RF
signals to the Branching unit.
2.6.3 Working Principle

An antenna comprises the reflector, feed boom, radome, shield, and mounting brackets.
Figure 2-32 shows the structure of the antenna.
NOTE
This topic considers the single-polarized antenna as an example to describe the working principle of
antennas. The dual-polarized antenna has two feed boom interfaces and thus can transmit the
electromagnetic waves in the vertical and horizontal polarization directions at the same time. The
working principles of each component of the dual-polarized antenna are similar to the working
principles of each component of the single-polarized antenna.
Figure 2-32 Structure of the antenna

4
3
2
1
1. Feed boom 2. Reflector 3. Shield

4. Radome 5. Mounting brackets
The functions of each component of the antenna are described as follows:

l Feed boom
The input port of the feed boom accesses the RF signals transmitted from the transceiver.
The accessed RF signals are transmitted through the waveguide to the output port of the
feed boom, which is located at the focal spot of the reflector. The output port of the feed

boom is equivalent to a preliminary horn antenna and radiates electromagnetic waves

towards the antenna reflector.
You can change the polarization direction of the antenna by rotating the feed boom.
Here, polarization direction refers to the direction of an electrical field in
electromagnetic waves. Figure 2-33 shows the polarization directions supported by the
rectangular waveguide.
NOTE
The polarization direction of the antenna must be the same as the polarization direction of the
ODU or hybrid coupler. The feed booms of certain types use the round waveguide. In this case,
see installation instruction of the antenna to adjust the polarization direction of an antenna
according to the polarization mark.
Figure 2-33 Polarization directions supported by the rectangular waveguide

Vertical Horizontal
polarization polarization
Direction of the
electrical field
l Reflector
Normally, the reflector of the antenna is a rotatable paraboloid. The reflector is mainly
used for determining the direction and providing the directive gain.
– In the transmit direction, the reflector reflects the electromagnetic waves radiated
from the feed boom so that the electromagnetic waves are directional.
– In the receive direction, the reflector assembles the electromagnetic waves from the
space to the output port of the feed boom.
l Radome
The radome protects the antenna from being damaged due to the wind, rain, and ice. The
electromagnetic waves can be radiated through the radome.
l Shield
The shield is installed on the HP antenna. The shield is mainly used for suppressing the
radiation of the side lobes.
l Mounting brackets
The mounting brackets are used for fixing the antenna onto the pole and for adjusting the
azimuth and elevation slightly. In addition to the mounting brackets, a reinforcing rod is
required for fixing the antenna with the diameter of not less than 1.2 meters.
2.6.4 Antenna Diameters

The antenna diameters vary according to the antenna type and the frequency band where the
antenna operates.
Table 2-38 and Table 2-39 list the diameters supported by different types of antennas. "Y"
indicates that the corresponding antenna diameter is supported. "NA" indicates that the
corresponding antenna diameter is not supported.

Table 2-38 Diameter of the single-polarized antenna

Freque Antenna Diameter
ncy
Band 0.3m 0.6m 0.9m 1.0m 1.2m 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 3.7m
6GHz N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
7/8GHz N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
11GHz Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A
Table 2-39 Diameter of the separate-mount dual-polarized antenna

Frequ Antenna Diameter
ency
Band 0.3m 0.6m 0.9m 1.0m 1.2m 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 3.7m
6GHz N/A N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y
7/8GH N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
z
11GHz N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A

Huawei provides a complete series of antennas. To obtain the technical documents about the
specifications of a specific antenna, contact the respective Huawei local office.
The technical specifications of the antenna include the electrical indexes and mechanical
indexes. The electrical indexes of the antenna include the antenna gain, half-power
beamwidth, VSWR, and front-to-back ratio. The mechanical indexes of the antenna include
the size, weight, wind-protective feature, and ice/snow-protective feature.
2.7 Feeder
A feeder is used to connect an antenna and a BU.
2.7.1 Elliptical Waveguide

An elliptical waveguide is a tube rigid waveguide with ripples. It is used to connect a BU and
an antenna that are far away from each other.

Appearance
Figure 2-34 Appearance of an elliptical waveguide
NOTE
Install appropriate flanges to both ends of an elliptical waveguide onsite.
Technical Specifications
NOTE
Multiple models of elliptical waveguides are available. The elliptical waveguides manufactured by
Huawei's partner Andrew is recommended. Table 2-40 lists the main technical specifications of Andrew
elliptical waveguides. You can view Andrew documents to obtain more detailed technical specifications.
Table 2-40 Technical specifications of an elliptical waveguide

Item Frequency Band
L6/U6 GHz 7/8 GHz 11 GHz
Andrew type EWP63-59W EWP77-71W EWP90S
Attenuation (dB/100 ≤4.98 ≤6.26 ≤10.31

m)
VSWR 1.06 1.06 1.05
Minimum Bending 260 (multiple bends) 230 (multiple bends) 180 (multiple bends)
Radius (mm) of 180 (single bend) 180 (single bend) 150 (single bend)
Plane E
Minimum Bending 740 (multiple bends) 635 (multiple bends) 480 (multiple bends)
Radius (mm) of 510 (single bend) 510 (single bend) 300 (single bend)
Plane H
Outer Diameter 51.1 x 29.5 43.6 x 25.4 33.5 x 20.3

(mm)
Weight (kg/m) 0.76 0.67 0.48
connector PDR70 PBR84 PBR100

Reference Information
Ensure that the bending radius of an elliptical waveguide is larger than the minimum value.
Do not twist an elliptical waveguide. To change the direction of a plane, bend two bows.
Figure 2-35 Bending an elliptical waveguide and changing the direction of a plane
2.7.2 Flexible Waveguide

A flexible waveguide is a rectangular waveguide used to connect antenna feeder components.
Appearance
Figure 2-36 Appearance of a flexible waveguide

Technical Specifications
Table 2-41 Technical specifications of a flexible waveguide

Frequenc Available Maximu Maximu Minimum Minimum Maximu Flange
y Band Length m m Bending Bending m Type
(m) Insertion Twisting Radius Radius Standing
Loss (dB) Angle (mm) of (mm) of Wave
(Degree) Plane E Plane H Ratio
6 GHz 0.9/1.2/1.8 0.2/0.3/0.4 195 102 204 1.1 PDR70
7/8 GHz 0.9/1.2/1.8 0.3/0.4/0.6 240/320/48 76 152 1.1 PBR84

0
11 GHz 0.6/0.9/1.2/ 0.24/0.4/0. 190/280/38 64 127 1.1 PBR100

1.8 5/0.8 0/560
Reference Information
Ensure that the bending radius of a flexible waveguide is larger than the minimum value. The
twisting angle cannot be larger than the maximum value.
Figure 2-37 Bending radius and twisting angle

RFU User Manual 3 Features
3 Features
About This Chapter
This section describes the microwave features supported by a multi-channel microwave

system containing ISM6 boards and RFUs. For information about other features, see the
OptiX RTN 950A Feature Description.
3.1 ODU and RFU

Using IF boards with ODUs is the most common configuration. To better support multi-
channel applications, ISM6 boards can also work with RFUs.
3.2 1+1 FD
1+1 FD is an operation mode of 1+1 protection. In 1+1 FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have frequency spacing between them for transmitting and receiving the same
service signal. The receive end selects a signal with better quality from the two received
signals. With 1+1 FD protection, the impact of fading on signal transmission is reduced.
3.3 SD Combination
Space diversity (SD) combination is a typical protection mode for long-distance radio links.
SD combination combines the main and diversity signals to protect services against multi-
path fading.
3.4 XPIC
The cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) technology is used together with the
co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) technology. Application of the two technologies
doubles the transmission capacity with channel conditions unchanged.
3.5 N+1 Protection
N+1 protection refers to the protection scheme in which N working channels in a microwave
direction share one protection channel. N+1 protection helps to increase the transmission
bandwidth in a microwave direction and provides protection.
3.6 ATPC
The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function is an important function of a radio
transmission system. The ATPC function reduces the interference of a transmitter to adjacent
systems and the residual bit error rate.
3.7 AM

The adaptive modulation (AM) function is a main characteristics in Integrated IP

microwavemode.
3.8 PLA/EPLA/EPLA+
Physical link aggregation (PLA) aggregates all Ethernet transmission paths in several
Integrated IP microwave links into a logical Ethernet link for higher Ethernet bandwidth and
Ethernet transmission reliability. Enhanced Physical Link Aggregation (EPLA) is enhanced
PLA. Enhanced Physical Link Aggregation Plus (EPLA+) is super PLA.

3.1 ODU and RFU

Using IF boards with ODUs is the most common configuration. To better support multi-
channel applications, ISM6 boards can also work with RFUs.
NOTE
This document describes the microwave features supported when IF boards work with RFUs. Technical
descriptions are also provided for those instances in which the microwave features are also supported by
IF boards working with ODUs.
Table 3-1 Microwave features

Microwave Feature ISM6+RFU IF+ODU
1+1 HSB Not supported Supported
1+1 FD Supported Supported
1+1 SD Not supported Supported
SD combination Supported Not supported
XPIC Supported Supported
N+1 protection Supported Supported
ATPC Supported Supported
AM Supported Supported
PLA/EPLA/EPLA+/Super Supported Supported

EPLA
AES-based Encryption at Supported Supported

Air Interfaces
Compression of Ethernet Supported Supported

frame headers
Enhanced Ethernet Frame Not supported Supported

Compression
Super EPLA Not supported Supported
3.2 1+1 FD
service signal. The receive end selects a signal with better quality from the two received

3.2.1 Introduction
This section defines 1+1 FD and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
service signals; the receive end selects a signal with better quality from the two received
Figure 3-1 shows the application of 1+1 FD. If NE2 detects that the signal at frequency F1 on
the main channel deteriorates, NE2 switches to receive the signal at frequency F2 on the
standby channel.
Figure 3-1 1+1 FD protection

Before the swtiching
Main channel Main channel
MODEM Transmitter Receiver MODEM

F1 F1
Service Service
F2 F2
NE1 Standby channel Standby channel NE2
After the swtiching
Main channel Main channel

F1 F1
Service Service
F2 F2
NE2 Standby channel Standby channel NE2
In 1+1 FD protection, the receive end receives signals at different frequencies from the main
and standby channels. Due to spatial fading, the microwave signal received on the main
channel may deteriorate. The service unit then selects the service signal on the standby
channel, ensuring signal integrity.
In addition, 1+1 FD supports 1+1 HSB switching.

Purpose
Compared with the 1+0 operation mode, 1+1 FD greatly improves anti-fading capability and
reliability of radio links.
3.2.2 Basic Concepts

This section describes the basic concepts that you need to be familiar with before you use the
1+1 FD feature.
3.2.2.1 System Configuration (Working with RFU)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports 1-3 FD protection groups.
1+1 FD (SD Combination Disabled)

One 1+1 FD protection group uses two channels and requires the following to be configured:
l One ISM6 board

l Two RFU-nonSDs
l One branching unit (not supporting service receipt in diversity mode)
l One single-polarized antenna (supporting separate installation)
Figure 3-2 shows a typical configuration of one 1+1 FD protection group.
Figure 3-2 Typical 1+1 FD configuration (SD combination disabled)
NOTE
The connection point on the IDU 950A is the IF port of an IF board.
1+1 FD (SD Combination Enabled)


l One ISM6 board

l Two RFU-SDs
l One branching unit (supporting services received in diversity mode)
l Two single-polarized antennas (supporting separate installation)
Figure 3-3 Typical 1+1 FD configuration (SD combination enabled)
NOTE
3.2.2.2 System Configuration(with ODU)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports one to five 1+1 FD protection groups.
One 1+1 FD protection group uses two channels and consists of the following items:
l Two single-IF boards of the same type or one dual-channel IF board

NOTE
On the NMS, you can configure an ISV3 board on the OptiX RTN 950A to work in IS2 or IS3
mode. When working in the IS2 mode, an ISV3 board is equivalent to an ISU2 or ISX2 board.
l Two ODUs
l One antenna (equipped with one balanced hybrid coupler) or two antennas
NOTE
If the two transmit frequencies used in a 1+1 FD protection group are within the frequency combining range
of one hybrid coupler, use one antenna equipped with one balanced hybrid coupler. Otherwise, use two
antennas.
Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 show several typical configurations of one
1+1 FD protection group on the OptiX RTN 950A.

Figure 3-4 Typical configuration of one 1+1 FD protection group (using one antenna/single-
IF board)
ODU
Hybrid
Antenna
coupler
ODU
System control, Switch & Timing board
IF board
FAN
IF board
IDU

Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of one 1+1 FD protection group (using two antennas/single-
IF board)
ODU Antenna
ODU Antenna
FAN
IF board
IF board
IDU

Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of one 1+1 FD protection group (using one antenna/dual-
channel IF board)
ODU
Hybrid
Antenna
coupler
ODU
IF board
FAN
IF board
IDU

Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of one 1+1 FD protection group (using two antenna/dual-
channel IF board)
ODU Antenna
ODU Antenna
FAN
IF board
IDU
3.2.2.3 System Configuration (Working with RFU)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports 1-3 FD protection groups.
1+1 FD (SD Combination Disabled)

l One ISM6 board
l Two RFU-nonSDs
l One branching unit (not supporting service receipt in diversity mode)

Figure 3-8 Typical 1+1 FD configuration (SD combination disabled)
NOTE
1+1 FD (SD Combination Enabled)

l One ISM6 board
l Two RFU-SDs
l One branching unit (supporting services received in diversity mode)

NOTE
3.2.2.4 Protection Type

1+1 FD provides revertive and non-revertive modes.
l Revertive mode
If an NE is in the switching state, it will clear the switching state and return to the normal
state after the working channel is restored and the normal state lasts for a certain period.
The period of time that must elapse after the working channel is restored and before the
NE clears the switching state is called the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. To prevent
frequent switching events caused by fluctuated working channel status, it is
recommended that you set the WTR time to 5 to 12 minutes.
l Non-revertive mode
If an NE is in the switching state, the NE remains the current state unchanged even
though the working channel is restored; the NE changes its state only after another
switching event occurs.
NOTE
Both the revertive and non-revertive modes apply only to HSB switching (switching on the equipment
side). For HSM switching (switching on the channel side), the IF board attempts to perform revertive
switching at specific intervals after HSM switching occurs, regardless of the reversion mode.
3.2.2.5 Switching Conditions

1+1 FD supports two types of switching: HSB switching and HSM switching. The two types
of switching are triggered by different conditions.
Trigger Conditions of 1+1 HSB Switching

HSB switching occurs on the equipment side. Equipment-side switching has the same
switching action and impact as 1+1 HSB switching but is triggered by different conditions.
NOTE
The switching conditions in Table 3-2 are listed in descending order of priorities.
Table 3-2 Trigger conditions of 1+1 FD HSB switching
Switching Condition Description
Clear switching (external All external switching states are cleared.

switching) NOTE
In revertive mode, the service is switched to the main IF board after
the clear switching operation is performed.
Lockout of protection The system changes its current switching state to the
(external switching) lockout of protection state. In the lockout of protection
state, switching does not occur until this state is cleared.

Forced switching (external In the lockout of protection state, forced switching does not
switching) occur. In any other switching states, the system switches
services from the main board to the standby board or from
the standby board to the main board, depending on the
command. The system then changes to the forced switching
state.
Fault on the main device If the system is in the lockout of protection or forced
switching state, or if the current standby device is faulty,
HSB switching does not occur. In other cases, the system
switches services from the current main board to the
standby board. The system then changes to the automatic
switching state. For the trigger conditions of automatic HSB
switching, see Table 3-3.
Manual switching (external If the system is in the lockout of protection or forced

switching) switching state, or if the current standby device is faulty,
switching does not occur. In other cases, the system
switches services from the main board to the standby board
or from the standby board to the main board depending on
the specific command. The system then changes to the
manual switching state.
Revertive switching (valid In the automatic switching state, revertive switching occurs
only in revertive mode) if the main device is restored and remains normal after the
WTR time elapses. During the period after the main device
is restored and before revertive switching occurs, the
system is in the WTR state. After the revertive switching,
the system changes to the normal state.
Table 3-3 Trigger conditions of automatic HSB switching

IF board hardware fault
ODU hardware fault
POWER_ALM (Fault on an ODU power

port)
VOLT_LOS (IF board)

Having the same priority
RADIO_TSL_HIGH
RADIO_TSL_LOW
RADIO_RSL_HIGH
IF_INPWR_ABN
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

Incorrect IF cable connection
BUS_ERR (0X08)
Trigger Conditions of 1+1 HSM Switching

HSM switching occurs on the channel side. Channel-side switching can be classified into the
following types:
l Automatic switching
Automatic switching refers to the HSM switching that is automatically triggered. After
the automatic switching, the IF board receives the baseband signal from its paired IF
board.
For the OptiX RTN 950A, the condition for triggering automatic HSM switching is
MW_FEC_UNCOR.
l Revertive switching
After automatic HSM switching occurs, the IF board attempts to perform revertive
switching at specific intervals. If no service alarm is detected on the main channel during
the switching, the IF board releases the switching.
3.2.2.6 Switching Impact

Services are interrupted during HSB switching. HSM switching does not affect services. If the
AM function is enabled, the standby channel in a 1+1 protection group consisting of IFU2
boards changes its modulation scheme for ensuring capacity after HSM switching occurs,
whereas the standby channel in a 1+1 protection group consisting of ISU2/ISX2/ISV3 boards
does not change its modulation scheme after HSM switching occurs. Therefore, after HSM
switching, services with a lower priority are impaired in the former scenario.
3.2.3 Principles
The switching principle of 1+1 FD in SDH radio is different from the switching principle of
1+1 FD in Integrated IP microwave.
3.2.3.1 SDH Radio

In HSB switching, the cross-connect unit receives TDM services from the standby IF board to
implement service protection. In HSM switching, the IF board receives baseband signals from
the standby receive channel to implement service protection.
NOTE
1+1 FD switching is triggered only on the faulty NE. The normal NE is not affected.
This section considers 1+1 FD on two single-IF boards as an example to describe the 1+1 FD switching
principle.

In the Transmit Direction
Figure 3-10 1+1 FD switching principles (before switching)

Main Main Service
Cross-connect Unit
Antenna ODU IF board Interface Unit
f1 3
MODEM MUX
1
4
2
f2 3
MODEM MUX E1/STM-1
4
Antenna Standby Standby
ODU IF board
Before switching:
1. The service interface unit receives service signals and forwards them to the cross-
connect unit.
2. The cross-connect unit forwards the service signals to both the main and standby IF
boards.
3. The main and standby IF boards convert the service signals into IF signals, and forward
them to the main and standby ODUs respectively.
4. The main and standby ODUs convert the IF signals into RF signals at different
frequencies and forward them to the antennas.
After switching:
The IF boards and ODUs process signals in the same way as before the switching.
In the Receive Direction

Main Main Cross-connect Unit Service Interface
Antenna IF board Unit
ODU
3 4
MODEM MUX
5 6
1 2
Diversity
3 Switch
1 2 E1/STM-1
MODEM MUX
3
4

ODU IF board
Before switching:

1. The antennas receive RF signals and forward them to the main and standby ODUs.
2. The main and standby ODUs convert the RF signals into IF signals, and forward them to
the main and standby IF boards respectively.
3. The MODEM unit on the main IF board converts the IF signals into baseband signals
and forwards them to the MUX unit on the same board. The MODEM unit on the
standby IF board converts the IF signals into baseband signals and forwards them to the
MUX unit on the same board and the MUX unit on the paired board.
4. The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards receive the baseband signals from the
MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards respectively.
5. The cross-connect unit receives the service signals from the main IF board and forwards
them to the service interface unit.
6. The service interface unit forwards the service signals to other equipment.
Figure 3-12 1+1 FD HSB switching principles (after switching)

ODU
1
MODEM MUX
Diversity
Switch 2
E1/STM-1
MODEM MUX
1

ODU IF board
After 1+1 FD HSB switching:

The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards receive service signals from the
MODEMs on the main and standby IF boards respectively. The cross-connect unit receives
the service signals from the standby IF board.
Figure 3-13 1+1 FD HSM switching principles (after switching)

ODU
1
MODEM MUX
2
Diversity
Switch
E1/STM-1
MODEM MUX

ODU IF board

After 1+1 FD HSM switching:

1. The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards receive baseband signals from the
MODEM units on the paired IF boards.
2. The cross-connect unit receives signals from the main IF board.
3.2.3.2 Integrated IP microwave

In HSB switching, the cross-connect unit receives TDM services from the standby IF board to
implement service protection on the TDM plane, and the packet switching unit performs LAG
switching to implement service protection on the packet plane. In HSM switching, the IF
board receives baseband signals from the standby receive channel to implement service
protection.
NOTE
l This section considers Integrated IP microwave (Native E1+Ethernet) services transmitted on two
single-IF boards as an example to describe 1+1 FD switching principle.
l 1+1 FD switching is triggered only on the faulty NE. The normal NE is not affected.
In the Transmit Direction

Main Main Cross-connect Unit
Antenna IF board
ODU
f1
6 5 2
MODEM MUX
7 Service Interface Unit
1 E1
Tx Switch 3
Ethernet
7 4
MODEM MUX
6 5
f2
Antenna Standby Standby Packet switching Unit
ODU IF board
Before switching:
1. The service interface unit receives E1 service signals, multiplexes them into VC-4s, and
forwards the VC-4s to the cross-connect unit.
2. The cross-connect unit forwards the E1 service signals in the VC-4s to both the main and
standby IF boards.
3. The service interface unit receives Ethernet service signals and forwards them to the
packet switching unit.
4. The packet switching unit, based on the 1+1 microwave protection group configurations,
configures the GE links that are connected to the main and standby IF boards into a

LAG. The packet switching unit forwards the Ethernet service signals to the main IF
board.
5. The MUX unit on the main IF board multiplexes the E1 service signals and Ethernet
service signals into Integrated IP microwave frames. The MUX unit on the standby IF
board multiplexes the E1 service signals into Integrated IP microwave frames.
6. The MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards receive the Integrated IP
microwave frames from the MUX unit on the main IF board, modulate the Integrated IP
microwave frames into IF signals, and forward the IF signals to the main and standby
ODUs respectively.
7. The main ODU converts the IF signals into RF signals at frequency f1 and forwards
them to the corresponding antenna. The standby ODU converts the IF signals into RF
signals at frequency f2 and forwards them to the corresponding antenna.

Antenna IF board
ODU
f1
2
MODEM MUX
4 Service Interface Unit
3 E1
Tx Switch
Ethernet
4
3
MODEM MUX
1
f2
ODU IF board

1. The packet switching unit forwards Ethernet service signals to the standby IF board by
means of LAG switching.
2. The cross-connect unit forwards E1 service signals to both the main and standby IF
boards.
3. The MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards receive Integrated IP microwave
frames from the MUX unit on the standby IF board, modulate the Integrated IP
microwave frames into IF signals, and forward the IF signals to the main and standby
ODUs respectively.
4. The main ODU converts the IF signals into RF signals at frequency f1 and forwards
them to the corresponding antenna. The standby ODU converts the IF signals into RF
signals at frequency f2 and forwards them to the corresponding antenna.

The IF boards and ODUs process signals in the same way as before the switching.
In the Receive Direction

Antenna IF board
ODU
f1 4 5
3 7
MODEM MUX
1 2 Service Interface Unit
6
E1
Diversity
3 Switch
5
9
Ethernet
1 2 8
MODEM MUX
3 4
f2
ODU IF board
Before switching:
1. The antennas receive RF signals at different frequencies, and forward them to the main
and standby ODUs respectively.
2. The main and standby ODUs convert the RF signals into IF signals, and forward them to
the main and standby IF boards respectively.
3. The MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards demodulate Integrated IP
microwave frames from the IF signals. The Integrated IP microwave frames
demodulated on the standby IF board are forwarded to the MUX unit on the main IF
board using the protection bus.
4. The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards receive the Integrated IP microwave
frames from the MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards respectively, and
demultiplex the Integrated IP microwave frames into E1 service signals and Ethernet
service signals.
5. The main and standby IF boards forward the E1 service signals to the cross-connect unit.
6. The main IF board forwards the Ethernet service signals to the packet switching unit.
7. The cross-connect unit receives the E1 service signals from the main IF board and
forwards them to the service interface unit.
8. The packet switching unit receives the Ethernet service signals from the main IF board.
9. The packet switching unit forwards the Ethernet service signals to the service interface
unit.


Antenna IF board
ODU
f1
2
1
MUX
4
MODEM
Service Interface Unit
E1
1 Diversity Switch
Ethernet
2
MODEM MUX
3
f2

ODU IF board

1. The Integrated IP microwave frames demodulated by the MODEM unit on the main IF
board are forwarded to the MUX unit on the standby IF board using the protection bus.
The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards receive the Integrated IP microwave
frames from the MODEM units on the main and standby IF boards respectively.
2. The MUX units on the main and standby IF boards demultiplex the Integrated IP
microwave frames into E1 service signals and Ethernet service signals.
3. The packet switching unit receives the Ethernet service signals from the standby IF
board by means of LAG switching.
4. The cross-connect unit and the packet switching unit receive the E1 service signals from
the standby IF board.
Figure 3-18 1+1 FD HSM switching principles (after switching)

Antenna IF board
ODU
f1
2
MODEM MUX
Service Interface Unit
E1
1 Diversity
Switch
Ethernet
2
MODEM MUX
f2
ODU IF board


1. The main IF board receives the Integrated IP microwave frames that are transmitted from
the MODEM unit on the standby IF board using the protection bus. The MUX unit on
the main IF board demultiplexes the Integrated IP microwave frames into E1 service
signals and Ethernet service signals.
2. The Ethernet connections from the packet switching unit to the main and standby IF
boards remain unchanged. The cross-connect unit and the packet switching unit receive
the service signals from the main IF board.
3.2.4 Specifications
This section provides the specifications of 1+1 FD.
Table 3-4 lists the specifications of 1+1 FD.
Table 3-4 Specifications of 1+1 FD

Item Specification
Radio type SDH radio

Integrated IP microwave
Number of protection groups l 1 to 5 (with ODUs)

l 1 to 3 (with RFUs)
Switching mode HSB

HSM
Protection type Revertive mode

Non-revertive mode
WTR time 5 to 12 minutes
Reverse switching Not supported
Restriction on the valid slot of the IF Pairs of IF boards must be configured in

board(inter-board 1+1 FD) paired slots, for example, slot 3 and slot 5,
slot 4 and slot 6, or slot 1 and slot 2.
Two ports on a dual-channel IF board can
form a 1+1 FD protection group. Two dual-
channel IF board can form two inter-board
1+1 FD protection groups only when the
two ports on each dual-channel IF board
form an XPIC group. The port number of
the two IF ports on dual-channel IF board in
an inter-board 1+1 FD protection group
must be the same.
Alarms and events of protection groups Supported

Item Specification
Configuration of conditions of reporting Supported

protection group alarms If Alarm Report Mode is set to Only
protection group alarms, you can set
whether to suppress MW_BER_SD,
MW_BER_EXC, MW_RDI,
RADIO_RSL_LOW, MAC_EXT_EXC, or
MAC_FCS_EXC alarms. These alarms are
not suppressed by default.
3.2.5 Availability
This section lists the license and hardware requirements that the product must meet in order to
run the 1+1 frequency diversity (FD) feature.
Hardware Requirements
Feature Name Board Type (Port Type)
1+1 FD IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)
3.2.6 Feature Updates

This section provides a history of 1+1 FD updates.
Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 1+1 FD was first available in this version.
V100R007C00 Conditions of reporting protection group alarms are

configurable first in this version.
V100R008C10 OptiX RTN 950A can use ISM6 boards with the RFU to
implement 1+1 FD.
3.2.7 Feature Dependencies and Limitations

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of 1+1 frequency diversity (FD).

Self-limitations
Table 3-5 Self-limitations

Item Description
Running mode and IF The running mode and IF service type must be consistently
service type configured for all member links in a 1+1 FD group.
Radio type For OptiX RTN 950A, links support 1+1 FD both when IF
boards and ODUs are used and when ISM6 boards and
RFUs are used.
Mix of different board types An ISV3 and an ISX2/ISU2 can form a 1+1 protection
group.
A dual-channel IF board cannot form a 1+1 FD protection
group together with other types of IF boards.
Slot ID Single-channel IF boards must be configured in paired slots.

Two dual-channel IF boards can form a 1+1 FD protection
group only when being housed in two paired slots.
dual-channel IF board l Two ports on a dual-channel IF board can form a 1+1

FD protection group. Two dual-channel IF boards can
form two inter-board 1+1 FD protection groups only
when the two ports on each dual-channel IF board form
an XPIC group. The port number of the IF ports in an
inter-board 1+1 FD protection group must be the same.
l A maximum of 63xE1 can be configured when the dual-
channel IF board is configured with intra-board 1+1. If
one IF port on a dual-channel IF board is a member in
an inter-board 1+1 protection group, the number of E1s
on the other IF port must be 0.

Dependencies and Limitations Between 1+1 FD and Other Features
Table 3-6 Dependencies and limitations between 1+1 FD and other features
Feature Description
SD When ISM6 boards and RFUs are used, links support 1+1 FD with SD
combinati combination enabled. The following figure shows the system configuration.
on
XPIC The two IF boards in a cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC)

group cannot be added to a 1+1 FD protection group, but two IF boards in
different XPIC groups can be added to a 1+1 FD protection group.
AM When 1+1 FD protection is configured for Integrated IP microwave links with

the adaptive modulation (AM) function enabled:
l After HSB switching occurs, the standby link uses the original modulation
scheme of the main link.
l After hitless switch mode (HSM) switching occurs, the standby channel in
a 1+1 FD protection group consisting of IFU2 boards works in AM
guaranteed capacity mode, and services with a lower priority are impaired;
the standby channel in a 1+1 FD protection group consisting of ISU2/
ISX2/ISV3 boards does not change its modulation scheme.

Feature Description
LAG l When a 1+1 FD protection group is being created for an Integrated IP

microwave link on an NE, the NE automatically creates a non-load sharing
LAG. In the LAG, the master port is the Integrated IP microwave port on
the main IF board and the slave port is the Integrated IP microwave port
on the standby IF board. This LAG can neither be displayed on the NMS
nor be configured manually.
l After two 1+1 FD protection group are created for an Integrated IP
microwave link, you can configure a load-sharing LAG. The master and
slave ports in the LAG must be the Integrated IP microwave ports on the
main IF boards in the two 1+1 FD protection groups. This type of LAG
can have a maximum of two members and supports only the manual load-
sharing mode.
– The service channels on the IF boards in slots 3 and 5 form one 1+1
FD protection group, and the service channels on the IF boards in slots
4 and 6 form the other 1+1 FD protection group.
– The microwave port on the IF board in slot 3 is configured as the
master port in the LAG, and the microwave port on the IF board in slot
4 is configured as the slave port in the LAG.
Figure 3-20 Load-sharing LAG consisting of the working ports in two

1+1 FD protection groups
Dual-polarized
antenna
V-polarization
H-polarization
ODU ODU
Working channel 1 Working channel 2
Hybrid Hybrid
coupler coupler
ODU ODU
Protection channel 1 Protection channel 2
CSHO SLOT 7
SLOT IF board SLOT 5 IF board SLOT 6
11
(FAN) IF board SLOT 3 IF board SLOT 4
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
EPLA After the 1+1 protection groups over integrated IP microwave are created,
you can configure EPLA. The main and slave ports in the EPLA group must
be the Integrated IP microwave ports on the main IF boards in the 1+1
protection groups.
Inband The protocol type of the inband DCN must be the same for all members in a
DCN 1+1 protection group.

Features That Conflict with 1+1 FD

This feature conflicts with the following features:
l N+1 protection
l PLA
l Super Dual Band
3.2.8 Planning Guidelines

This section provides the guidelines to be followed when you plan 1+1 FD.
Plan the parameters related to the protection configuration:

l If the protection group works in revertive mode, set the wait-to-restore (WTR) time to a
value in the range of 5 to 12 minutes. It is recommended that you set the WTR time to
the default value (10 minutes).
l For the inter-board 1+1 FD, install a pair of main and standby IF boards in slots 3 and 5
(the IF board in slot 3 as the main board), slots 4 and 6 (the IF board in slot 4 as the main
board), or slots 1 and 2 (the IF board in slot 1 as the main board).The IF port numbers of
the members in the same protection group must be the same when inter-board 1+1 FD is
configured on dual-channel IF board.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms
and suppress all related alarms.
3.2.9 Relevant Alarms and Events

If 1+1 FD switching occurs on IF boards, the system reports corresponding alarms and
abnormal events.Related alarms and performance events are reported if the entire protection
group fails or the protection group deteriorates.
Relevant Alarms
l RPS_INDI
The RPS_INDI alarm indicates microwave protection switching.
l PG_PRT_DEGRADED
The PG_PRT_DEGRADED alarm indicates that the main link or standby link in a 1+1
protection group is faulty.
l PG_LINK_FAIL
The PG_LINK_FAIL alarm indicates that the links in a 1+1 protection group fail.
Relevant Performance Events

l IF 1+1 protection switching indicates that IF 1+1 protection switching occurs.
l PG_IF_BBE indicates protection group background block errors.
l PG_IF_ES indicates protection group errored seconds.
l PG_IF_SES indicates protection group severely errored seconds.
l PG_IF_CSES indicates protection group consecutive severely errored seconds.

l PG_IF_UAS indicates protection group unavailable seconds.
3.2.10 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when 1+1 FD is used.
Q: During the configuration of 1+1 FD protection, is it necessary to configure the IF

port on the standby IF board?
A: It is unnecessary because the system automatically copies the data on the main IF board to
the standby IF board. However, it is necessary to configure ODU interface data for both the
main and standby ODUs on the NMS.
Q: Why does the configuration of 1+1 FD protection fail?
A: Common causes are as follows:
l The IF boards or the corresponding ODUs that form 1+1 FD protection are not shown in
the slot layout.
l The main and standby IF boards are not configured in paired slots.
l The standby IF board is configured with services.
l The standby IF board has a lower licensed capacity than the main IF board.
l The two IF boards or two IF ports in an IF 1+1 protection group run in different chip
modes.
Q: Why is reverse switching inapplicable to 1+1 FD protection?
A: In 1+1 FD mode, both the main and standby ODUs are not muted. Hence, the source end
cannot clear the service alarm at the sink end by switching the working ODU. Therefore,
reverse switching does not apply to 1+1 FD protection.
Q: If radio links work as ECCs, why is the NMS unable to receive HSB switching events
of non-gateway NEs?
A: After HSB switching occurs, traffic carried on ECCs is rerouted. As a result, ECCs
between the gateway NE and non-gateway NEs are transiently interrupted and the switching
events fail to be reported.
Q: How to deal with a 1+1 FD switching failure?
A: If 1+1 FD switching fails, check whether the standby IF board reports an alarm. If yes,
handle the alarm immediately, and then perform manual switching to verify the 1+1 FD
switching.
3.3 SD Combination
Space diversity (SD) combination is a typical protection mode for long-distance radio links.
path fading.

3.3.1 Introduction
This section defines space diversity (SD) combination and describes its purpose.
Definition
SD combination combines two channels of signals from two spatially separated antennas that
receive the same radio frequency (RF) signals into one channel of signals, to substantially
reduce impact of multi-path fading. SD combination takes advantage of the fact that fading on
different paths is different because the multi-path effects are different.
On OptiX RTN 950A, two channels of received signals are combined by the IF combiner of
an RFU-SD, so SD combination is also called SD IF combination.
Purpose
SD combination is generally used for long-distance radio links with serious multi-fading, for
example, radio links over lakes or the sea with serious water surface reflection. If the receive
power of the main and diversity antennas is about the same, using SD combination can
improve the system gain by about 2.5 dB.
As shown in Figure 3-21, the RFU-SD provides two RF receivers to receive RF signals from
the main and diversity antennas. After the two channels of RF signals are down-converted
into IF signals by the RF receivers, the IF combiner combines the signals into one channel of
IF signals. Because the main antenna and diversity antenna are spatially separated, correlation
the two channels of IF signals is low. That is, generally, multi-path fading does not occur on
both channels at the same time, so the positions of notches are different in the two channels of
signals. After combination, the notch depth is decreased to a level that does not affect
services.
Figure 3-21 SD combination
3.3.2 System Configuration

To use space diversity (SD) combination, OptiX RTN 950A must be configured with RFU-
SDs and branching units supporting services received in diversity mode. This section uses a
group of 6+0/5+1 radio links as an example.

NOTE
SD combination can also be used with cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC). For details
about the system configuration, see System Configuration (long haul) of XPIC.
6+0/5+1 Radio Links (ACCP)

Each group of 6+0/5+1 radio links occupy six channels and are configured with:
l Three ISM6 boards

l Six RFU-SDs
l Two branching units (supporting services received in diversity mode)
Figure 3-22 shows typical configuration for a group of 6+0/5+1 radio links in adjacent
channel co-polarized (ACCP) mode.
Figure 3-22 Typical configuration of a group of 6+0/5+1 radio links (ACCP)
NOTE
6+0/5+1 Radio Links (ACAP or CCDP)

In the case of adjacent channel alternate polarization (ACAP), each group of 6+0/5+1 radio
links occupies six channels. In the case of co-channel dual polarization, each group of
6+0/5+1 radio links occupies three channels and is configured with:
l Three ISM6 boards

l Six RFU-SDs
l Two branching units (supporting services received in diversity mode)
l Two dual-polarized antennas (supporting separate installation)

Figure 3-23 shows typical configuration for a group of 6+0/5+1 radio links in ACAP or
CCDP mode.
Figure 3-23 Typical configuration of a group of 6+0/5+1 radio links (ACAP or CCDP)
NOTE
3.3.3 Principles
On OptiX RTN 950AL, an RFU-SD combines the received main and diversity signals to
implement space diversity (SD) combination.
Figure 3-24 Principle of SD combination

After an RFU-SD receives main and diversity radio frequency (RF) signals:
1. The main and diversity RF signals are amplified by a low noise amplifier (LNA).
2. The amplified RF signals are converted into IF signals.
– Main RF signals are down-converted into main IF signals through carrier-wave
signals.
– Diversity RF signals are down-converted into diversity IF signals through carrier-
wave signals.
– A controller uses the phase aligning circuit to change phases of carrier-wave signals
and align phases of the main and diversity IF signals.
3. The delay compensation module aligns delay compensation of the main and diversity IF
signals.
4. After the delay and phases of the main and diversity IF signals are aligned, the IF
combiner combines the signals and outputs SD combination signals to the IF board.
This section provides the specifications of space diversity (SD) combination.
Table 3-7 Specifications of SD combination

Item Specifications
Typical system gain improvement 2.5 dB
3.3.5 Availability
This section lists the hardware requirements that OptiX RTN 980L must meet in order to run
the space diversity (SD) combination feature.
Feature Name Applicable RFU
SD combination RFU-SD

This section provides a history of SD Combination updates.
Feature Updates
Issue Description
V100R008C10 SD combination is first available in this version.


This section describes the dependencies and limitations of space diversity (SD) combination.
Self-limitations

Item Description
RFU RFU-SDs must be used.
Branching unit Branching units supporting receiving in diversity mode

must be used.
IF board ISM6 boards
Waveguide/RF cable length The waveguide/RF cable length difference between the BU-
to-main antenna and BU-to-SD antenna must less than 25m.
Dependencies and Limitations Between SD Combination and Other Features
Table 3-9 Dependencies and Limitations Between SD Combination and Other Features
Feature Impact
Link protection features, SD combination can be used together with these protection
such as N+1 protection, features. Protection switching is triggered only when the
EPLA, and PLA combined signals are faulty.
Features That Conflict with SD Combination

None.

This section provides guidelines for planning space diversity (SD) combination.
l SD combination is generally used for long-distance radio links with serious multi-fading,
for example, radio links over lakes or the sea with serious water surface reflection.
l To use the SD combination technology, the RF transceiver type must be RFU-SD and the
branching unit must support services received in diversity mode.
l The two antennas must be physically separated with an enough height difference so that
microwave signals received in main and diversity modes are not much spatially
correlated.
3.3.9 Related Alarms and Events

This section describes the alarms reported when an RFU-SD fails to perform space diversity
(SD) combination.

Related Alarms
l RFUSD_DELAY_UNEQUAL
This alarm indicates that the delay of main and diversity signals is not aligned.
Events
None
3.3.10 FAQs
This section answers FAQs about space diversity (SD) combination.
None
3.4 XPIC
The cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) technology is used together with the
co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) technology. Application of the two technologies
doubles the transmission capacity with channel conditions unchanged.
3.4.1 Introduction
This section defines XPIC and describes its purpose.
Definition
The XPIC technology works with the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) technology so
that the transmitter transmits two electromagnetic waves whose polarization directions are
orthogonal to each other to the receiver over the same channel. The receiver recovers the
original two channels of signals after canceling the interference between the two
electromagnetic waves through the XPIC processing.
The XPIC technology doubles the transmission capacity with channel unchanged. The
transmission of two service signals in one microwave direction is considered as an example.
l When the XPIC technology is not used, adjacent channel alternated polarization (ACAP)
is used, allowing two RF channels to transmit two service signals. See Figure 3-25.
l When the XPIC technology is used, CCDP is used, allowing one RF channel to transmit
two service signals. See Figure 3-26(the cooperation with ODUs is used as an example).
Figure 3-25 ACAP channel configuration, used when XPIC is not used
Site A Site B
Modem Modem
ODU 1 ODU 1
f1 f1 f1
Service Service
H
V
Service f2 f2 Service
f2
ODU 2 ODU 2
Modem Modem
Service signal
H: horizontal polarization direction

V: vertical polarization direction

Figure 3-26 CCDP channel configuration, used when XPIC is used

Site A Site B
Modem Modem
ODU 1 f1 ODU 1
H
V
ODU 2 ODU 2
Modem Modem
Service signal
H: horizontal polarization direction
V: vertical polarization direction
Purpose
The XPIC technology is used to double the link transmission capacity over the same channel.

XPIC feature.
3.4.2.1 CCDP and XPIC

The co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) and cross-polarization interference cancellation
(XPIC) technologies are developed based on microwave polarization characteristics. CCDP,
wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization waves, doubles the
transmission capacity. XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference between the two
polarization waves.
Microwave transmission can be classified into single-polarized transmission and CCDP
transmission by polarization transmission mode.
l In single-polarized transmission, a signal is transmitted over the horizontally polarized
wave or the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 3-27.
l In CCDP transmission, two signals are transmitted over the horizontally polarized wave
and the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 3-28.
The capacity in CCDP transmission mode is twice the capacity in single-polarized
transmission mode.

Figure 3-27 Single-polarized transmission
Figure 3-28 CCDP transmission
The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two
orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and then the receiver can easily recover
the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of
the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization
discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel deterioration. To cancel the interference, the
XPIC technology is used to receive and process the signals in the horizontal and vertical
directions so that the original signals are recovered.
3.4.2.2 System Configuration(with ODU)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports one to five XPIC groups.
Each XPIC group uses one frequency and consists of the following items:
l Two single-IF boards supporting the XPIC function or one dual-channel IF board
l Two ODUs
l One dual-polarized antenna in separate mounting mode or one dual-polarized antenna
with an OMT in direct mounting mode
Figure 3-29, Figure 3-30, Figure 3-31, and Figure 3-32 show OptiX RTN 950A typical
configurations using two single-IF boards supporting the XPIC function or one dual-channel
IF board to configure an XPIC group.When two single-IF boards supporting the XPIC
function are used to configure an XPIC group, the two boards are connected through the
XPIC cable to transmit XPIC signals.

Figure 3-29 Typical XPIC configuration (with one dual-polarized antenna in separate
mounting modetwo single-IF boards supporting the XPIC function and separately-mounted,
dual-polarized antenna)
ODU
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU
XPIC IF board
FAN
XPIC IF board
IDU
Figure 3-30 Typical XPIC configuration (with one dual-polarized antenna with an OMT in
direct mounting modetwo single-IF boards supporting the XPIC function and directly-
mounted, dual-polarized antenna with OMT)
ODU
Dual-polarized
OMT
Antenna
ODU
XPIC IF board
FAN
XPIC IF board
IDU

Figure 3-31 Typical XPIC configuration (with dual-channel IF board and separately-
mounted, dual-polarized antenna)
ODU
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU
FAN
Dual-IF board
IDU
Figure 3-32 Typical XPIC configuration (with dual-channel IF board and directly-mounted,
dual-polarized antenna with OMT)
ODU
Dual-polarized
OMT
Antenna
ODU
FAN
Dual-IF board
IDU

3.4.2.3 System Configuration (with RFU)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports one to Three XPIC groups. This section uses the
configuration of three XPIC groups as an example.
XPIC (SD Combination Disabled)

Each XPIC group uses one frequency and requires the following to be configured:
l One ISM6 board

l Two RFU-nonSDs
l Two branching units (not supporting service receipt in diversity mode)
l One dual-polarized antenna (supporting separate installation)
Figure 3-33 shows a typical configuration of three XPIC groups.
Figure 3-33 Typical XPIC configuration (SD combination disabled)
NOTE
The RFU connection points on the IDU 950A correspond to IF ports of IF boards.
XPIC (SD Combination Enabled)

Each XPIC group uses one frequency and requires the following to be configured:
l One ISM6 board

l Two RFU-SDs
l Two branching units (supporting service receipt in diversity mode)
l Two dual-polarized antennas (supporting separate installation)
Figure 3-34 shows a typical configuration of three XPIC groups.

Figure 3-34 Typical XPIC configuration (SD combination enabled)
NOTE
The RFU connection points on the IDU 950A correspond to IF ports of IF boards.
3.4.2.4 XPIC Feature and 1+1 Protection Configuration

One XPIC group cannot form a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group, but two XPIC groups can
form two 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection groups in one polarization direction.
NOTE
If XPIC is implemented using ISM6 boards and RFUs, only 1+1 FD protection groups can be set up. In
the following example, IF boards and ODUs are used to implement XPIC.
XPIC Group with 1+1 Protection Configured on Single-IF Boards

Figure 3-35 shows an example wherein two XPIC groups form two 1+1 HSB protection
groups respectively in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions.
l The service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 3 and 4 form one XPIC group, and
the service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 5 and 6 form another.
l The service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 3 and 5 form one 1+1 HSB
protection group, and the service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 4 and 6 form
another.
l The service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 3 and 4 are the main channels of the
two 1+1 HSB protection groups. In normal cases, the two main channels in the
horizontal and vertical polarization directions transmit services.
l The service channels of the XPIC IF boards in slots 5 and 6 are the standby channels of
the two 1+1 HSB protection groups.

NOTE
If the radio links in the vertical polarization direction of two XPIC groups form a 1+1 HSB protection
group and the radio links in the horizontal polarization direction of the two XPIC groups form another
1+1 HSB protection group, you can create a manual load-sharing LAG or EPLA using the two 1+1 HSB
protection groups. The main and slave ports in the LAG or EPLA must be the Integrated IP microwave
ports on the main IF boards in the 1+1 HSB protection groups. As shown in Figure 3-35, the Integrated
IP microwave port on the IF board in slot 3 is configured as the main port in the LAG or EPLA, and the
Integrated IP microwave port on the IF board in slot 4 is configured as the slave port in the LAG or
EPLA.
Figure 3-35 Typical XPIC configuration (1+1 protection configuration)
V-polarization
Dual-polarized
H-polarization antenna
ODU ODU
Hybrid Hybrid
coupler coupler
ODU ODU
Protection channel 1 Protection channel 2
CSHO SLOT 7
SLOT XPIC IF board SLOT 5 XPIC IF board SLOT 6
11
(FAN) XPIC IF board SLOT 3 XPIC IF board SLOT 4
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
NOTE
An OMT must be installed on a direct-mount dual-polarized antenna.
In the receive direction, if the XPIC IF board in slot 3 is faulty or its connected ODU is faulty,
HSB switching occurs on the equipment and services are switched to the channel of the XPIC
IF board in slot 5. The fault also causes loss of the XPIC cancellation signal sent from the
XPIC IF board in slot 3 to the XPIC IF board in slot 4. As a result, HSB switching occurs on
the XPIC IF board in slot 4 and services are switched to the channel of the XPIC IF board in
slot 6. Therefore, services are switched from one XPIC group to another.
In the transmit direction, if signal transmission in the polarization direction (vertically, for
example) corresponding to the XPIC IF board in slot 3 is faulty (for example, a transmitter of
the ODU fails), switching occurs at the local end. That is, services are switched from the
XPIC IF board in slot 3 to the XPIC IF board in slot 5. Meanwhile, switching occurs in the
horizontal polarization direction. That is, services are switched from the XPIC IF board in slot
4 to the XPIC IF board in slot 6.
XPIC Group with 1+1 Protection Configured on dual-channel IF board

Figure 3-36 shows an example wherein two XPIC groups form two 1+1 HSB protection
groups respectively in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions.

l The service channels of port 1 and port 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 form one
XPIC group, and the service channels of port 1 and port 2 on the dual-channel IF board
in slot 5 form another.
l The service channels on the two ports (port 1) on the dual-channel IF board in slots 3 and
slot 5 form one 1+1 HSB protection group, and the service channels on the two ports
(port 2) on the dual-channel IF board in slots 3 and slot 5 form another.
l The service channels of ports 1 and 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 are both the
main channels of the two 1+1 HSB protection groups.
l The service channels of ports 1 and 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 5 are both the
standby channels of the two 1+1 HSB protection groups.
NOTE
If the radio links in the vertical polarization direction of two XPIC groups form a 1+1 HSB protection
group and the radio links in the horizontal polarization direction of the two XPIC groups form another
1+1 HSB protection group, you can create a manual load-sharing LAG or EPLA using the two 1+1 HSB
protection groups. The main and slave ports in the LAG or EPLA must be the Integrated IP microwave
ports on the main IF boards in the 1+1 HSB protection groups. As shown in Figure 3-36, port 1 on the
dual-channel IF board in slot 3 is configured as the main port in the LAG or EPLA, and port 2 on the
dual-channel IF board in slot 3 is configured as the slave port in the LAG or EPLA.
Figure 3-36 Typical XPIC configuration (1+1 protection configuration)
V-polarization
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU
Working channel 1
H-polarization
Hybrid
coupler
ODU
Protection channel 1
ODU
Working channel 2
Hybrid
coupler
ODU
Protection channel 2
CSHO SLOT 7
SLOT Dual-IF board SLOT 5 SLOT 6
11
(FAN) Dual-IF board SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
NOTE
An OMT must be installed on a direct-mount dual-polarized antenna.
In the receive direction, if HSB switching occurs on port 1 on the dual-channel IF board in
slot 3, services are switched to port 1 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 5. The fault also
causes loss of the XPIC signal sent from port 1 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 to port 2
on it. As a result, 1+1 HSB switching occurs port 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 and

services are switched to port 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 5. Thus, services are
switched from one XPIC workgroup to another.
In the transmit direction, if signal transmission in the polarization direction (vertically, for
example) corresponding to port 1 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 is faulty (for example,
a transmitter of the ODU fails), switching occurs at the local end. That is, services are
switched from port 1 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 to port 1 on the dual-channel IF
board in slot 5. Meanwhile, switching occurs in the horizontal polarization direction. That is,
services are switched from port 2 on the dual-channel IF board in slot 3 to port 2 on the dual-
channel IF board in slot 5.
3.4.3 Principles
A cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) intermediate frequency (IF) board
processes incoming signals in the horizontal and vertical polarization directions so that the
original signals can be recovered from interference.
This section considers two single-IF boards supporting the XPIC function as an example to
describe XPIC principle.
Figure 3-37 Realization principle of the XPIC

Horizontal
polarization
XPIC module of IF board
Modem
horizontal A/D Filter Decision
Coefficient
control
Cross
interference Filter
XPIC module of IF board

Cross Filter
interference
Coefficient
control
Modem
A/D Filter Decision
vertical
Vertical
polarization
The realization principle is as follows:

1. The transmitter transmits two co-frequency signals over a horizontal polarization wave
and a vertical polarization wave.
2. Cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) and channel performance degradation result in
cross-polarization interference during signal transmission. The two ODUs receive these
affected signals and transmit them to the two XPIC IF board.
3. The XPIC module of an XPIC IF board receives the IF signal from an ODU and the IF
signal from the other XPIC IF board, and performs A/D conversion for the IF signals.
4. The XPIC module of the XPIC IF board controls the coefficient of the feed forward
equalizer filters (FFF) for the two IF signals by using the decision feedback equalizer
(DFE). After the two IF signals are filtered and combined, interference is eliminated.
This section provides the specifications of XPIC.

Table 3-10 lists the specifications of XPIC.
Table 3-10 Specifications of XPIC

Item Specification
ISX2 ISV3 ISM6
Radio link form l Integrated IP microwave (Native E1 and Native Ethernet)

l Integrated IP microwave (Native STM-1 and Native Ethernet)
l SDH microwave
l Mixed microwave
NOTE
Mixed microwave has different microwave types in two polarization
directions. For example, one polarization direction transmits SDH
microwave services, whereas the other polarization direction transmits
Native E1 and Native Ethernet services of Integrated IP microwave.
Alternatively, one polarization direction transmits Native STM-1 and
Native Ethernet services of Integrated IP microwave, whereas the other
polarization direction transmits Native E1 and Native Ethernet services
of integrated IP microwave.
Maximum number Three groups l Five groups

of XPIC workgroups (with ODUs)
l Three groups
(with RFUs)
Implementation Hardware
mode
XPIC decouplinga Supported
Channel spacing 7MHz, 14MHz, l ETSI: 7MHz, l With ODU:

28MHz, 40MHz, 14MHz, 28MHz, 7MHz, 14MHz,
50MHz, 56MHz 40MHz, 56 MHz 28MHz, 40MHz,
l FCC: 10MHz, 56 MHz,
20MHz, 30MHz, 112MHz
40MHz, 50MHz l With RFU:
28MHz, 40MHz,
56 MHz
NOTE
a: When the link in one polarization direction is interrupted due to a fault at the receive or transmit end,
XPIC decoupling enables the link and its carried services in the other polarization direction to recover
after a brief interruption.
3.4.5 Availability
run the cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) feature.

XPIC ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)

This section provides a history of XPIC updates.
Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 XPIC is first available in this version.
V100R007C10 XPIC group with the channel spacing of 112 MHz is first
supported in this version.
V100R008C10 OptiX RTN 950A can use ISM6 boards with the RFU to
implement XPIC.

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of the cross polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) feature.
Self-limitations
Item Description
Radio type For OptiX RTN 950A, links support XPIC protection both
when IF boards and ODUs are used and when ISM6 boards
and RFUs are used.
Inter-NE configuration An XPIC group can be configured only on one NE. Inter-
NE configuration is not allowed.
IF cable and waveguide The maximum difference between the IF cables in two
length polarization directions of an XPIC group cannot exceed 12
meters in length when IF boards work with ODUs.
In an XPIC group, the difference between the total lengths
of the IF cable and waveguide/RF cable in the vertical
polarization and the total length of the IF cable and
waveguide/RF cable in the horizontal polarization must not
exceed 12 m when IF boards work with RFUs.

Item Description
Mix of different board types If an ISV3 board and an ISX2 board form an XPIC group,
the ISV3 board must work in IS2 mode.
dual-channel IF board l Dual-channel IF boards do not support inter-board

XPIC.
l On a dual-channel IF board configured with XPIC and
1+1 protection, if one IF port is configured with more
than 63 E1s, the other IF port must be configured with 0
E1.
ODU In an XPIC group, if a 7 or 8 GHz XMC-3 ODU is used in

one polarization direction, an XMC-2/XMC-2H ODU must
not be used in the other polarization direction.
Dependencies and Limitations Between XPIC and Other Features
Table 3-12 Dependencies and limitations between XPIC and other features
Feature Description
SD combination When ISM6 boards and RFUs are used, links support XPIC
protection with SD combination enabled. The following
figure shows the system configuration.
Figure 3-38 Typical XPIC configuration (SD combination

enabled)

Feature Description
1+1 l One XPIC group cannot form a 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or
1+1 SD protection group.
l As shown in Figure 3-35, the radio links in the vertical
polarization direction of two XPIC groups form a 1+1
HSB, 1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD protection group, and the
radio links in the horizontal polarization direction of the
two XPIC groups form another 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, or
1+1 SD protection group. You can create a manual load-
sharing LAG or EPLA/EPLA+ using the two 1+1 HSB,
1+1 FD, or 1+1 SD protection groups. For details, see
3.4.2.4 XPIC Feature and 1+1 Protection
Configuration.
AM Cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) can

work with AM. However, it is not recommended that you
use the two functions together. When using the two
functions together, ensure that the AM parameters are
consistently set for the links in the horizontal and vertical
polarization directions in an XPIC group.
LAG l you can manually create a load-sharing link aggregation

group (LAG) using the two member links in an XPIC
group.
l If N+0 non-protection links are member links in
multiple XPIC groups, you can manually create a load-
sharing LAG that consists of all member links in the
XPIC groups. If four member links in two XPIC groups
are 4+0 non-protection links, you can manually create a
load-sharing LAG that consists of the four member
links.
l The Ethernet header compression mode, guaranteed E1/
STM-1 capacity, E1 priority (enabled or disabled), and
full E1 capacity parameters must be consistently set for
members in a LAG.
ATPC XPIC can work with automatic transmit power control

(ATPC). However, it is not recommended that you use the
two functions together. When using the two functions
together, pay attention to the following points:
l The ATPC parameters, such as ATPC status (enabled or
disabled) and ATPC adjustment thresholds, must be
consistently set for links in the horizontal and vertical
l The difference between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold must be minimized (5 dB is
recommended).

Feature Description
N+1 Members of an XPIC group that consists of ISX2/ISV3/

ISM6 boards can be configured into an N+1 protection
group. Note that members in an XPIC group can be
configured into only the same N+1 protection group.
PLA l Two links in an XPIC group can be configured in a PLA

group. If ISX2/ISV3 boards consist of the PLA group,
they must be in two paired slots.
l If a link in an XPIC group and another link not in the
XPIC group form a PLA group, the other link in the
XPIC group cannot be configured with PLA.
EPLA/EPLA+ l You can create an EPLA/EPLA+ using the two member

links in an XPIC group.
l If four member links in two XPIC groups form 4+0 non-
protection links, you can create an EPLA/EPLA+ group
to protect the four links. If two of the 3+0 non-
protection links are member links in an XPIC group,
you can create an EPLA/EPLA+ group to protect all
links.
Super Dual Band Two common-band microwave links can form an XPIC
group.
Features That Conflict with XPIC

None

This section provides the guidelines to be followed when you plan XPIC.
l When co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) is applied to radio links, XPIC IF boards
must be installed and the XPIC function must be enabled.
l Set the transmit frequency, transmit power, T/R spacing, ATPC parameters (ATPC
enabling status and ATPC adjustment thresholds), channel spacing, modulation scheme,
and AM parameters to the same values for the links in the horizontal and vertical
polarization directions in an XPIC workgroup.
l If dual-channel IF board form XPIC workgroups, it is recommended that port 1 should
be used for vertical polarization, and port 2 should be used for horizontal polarization.
l If 1+1 protection is not used for an XPIC group formed by single-IF boards, it is
recommended that you plan slots for IF boards as specified in Table 3-13.

Table 3-13 Slots for XPIC IF boards of an XPIC workgroup (without 1+1 protection)
Slot Slot for the Board Slot for the Board
Processing Vertically Processing
Polarized Signals Horizontally Polarized
Signals
Slot 3/5 Slot 3 Slot 5
l If an XPIC workgroup is configured with 1+1 protection, it is recommended that you

plan slots for IF boards as specified in Table 3-14.
Table 3-14 Slots for XPIC IF boards of an XPIC workgroup (with 1+1 protection)
Slot Slot for the Slot for the Slot for the Slot for the
Working Working Protection Protection
Board Board Board Board
Processing Processing Processing Processing
Vertically Horizontally Vertically Horizontally
Polarized Polarized Polarized Polarized
Signals Signals Signals Signals
Slot 3/4/5/6 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6

When the XPIC signal is lost, the XPIC IF board reports the corresponding alarm.
Relevant Alarms
XPIC_LOS
The XPIC_LOS alarm indicates that XPIC signals are lost.
Relevant Events
XPIC_XPD_VALUE
The XPIC_XPD_VALUE indicates the XPD value after the XPIC function is enabled.
3.4.10 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when XPIC is used.
Q: How to handle the link faults that occur in the two polarization directions of an XPIC
workgroup?
A: To rectify the fault, do as follows:

l Check whether the data configuration is correct.

The two IF port that form an XPIC workgroup must have the same transmit frequency
and T/R spacing. If you enable the AM feature for the radio links in the horizontal and
vertical polarization directions of one XPIC workgroup, Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity of the two
radio links must be the same.
l Check whether the cables are connected correctly.
Configuring the XPIC workgroup involves connecting the IF cables, connecting the
XPIC cables, and installing the ODU separately from the antenna, especially when the
XPIC workgroup is configured with 1+1 protection. Divide the cables into two parts
according to the polarization directions of signals and then check each part.
l Check whether the dual-polarized antenna is aligned in the correct polarized direction.
The XPD can meet the specifications for the antenna only when the polarization
direction of the dual-polarized antenna is aligned correctly.
Q: How does the OptiX RTN 950A allow the member link in one polarization direction
in an XPIC workgroup to fail transiently when the member link in the other
polarization direction fails?
A: The OptiX RTN 950A supports the XPIC decoupling protocol. The XPIC decoupling
protocol enables a member link in an XPIC workgroup to recover from transient service
interruption when the other member link fails due to a receiver fault or a transmitter fault.
l After detecting a local receiver fault occurs in a polarization direction, the NE disables
the XPIC function in the other polarization direction and instructs the opposite NE to
mute the opposite ODU in the faulty polarization direction.
l After detecting an opposite transmitter fault occurs in a polarization direction, the NE
disables the XPIC function in the other polarization direction.
3.5 N+1 Protection

N+1 protection refers to the protection scheme in which N working channels in a microwave
direction share one protection channel. N+1 protection helps to increase the transmission
bandwidth in a microwave direction and provides protection.
3.5.1 Introduction
This section defines N+1 protection and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition
N+1 protection refers to the protection configuration that N microwave working channels in a
microwave direction share one microwave protection channel.
N+1 protection provides protection for microwave channels. The IF board, ODU, and radio
link on the working channel can be protected through the N+1 protection. The N+1 protection
provides N working channels and one protection channel. When the working channel
becomes faulty, the normal services on the working channel can be switched to the protection
channel for transmission. When the working channel is restored to normal, the protection
channel can transmit extra services.
Figure 3-39 shows the application of N+1 protection.

Figure 3-39 N+1 protection
Site A Working Site B

channel 1
Normal Normal
service 1 service1
... Working ...
channel N
Normal Normal
service N service N
Protection
channel
Extra Extra
service service
Protection switching
Site A Working Site B

channel 1
Normal Normal
service 1 service1
... Working ...
channel N
Normal Normal
service N service N
Protection
channel
Extra Extra
service service
Purpose
Compared with radio links configured with N+0 protection, radio links configured with N+1
protection have stronger reliability.

This section describes the basic concepts with which you should be familiar before you use
the N+1 protection.
3.5.2.1 System Configuration (Working with RFUs)

The OptiX RTN 950A supports N+1 (N ≤ 5) protection. This section describes the
configuration of N+1 (N = 5) protection.
NOTE
The following describes the configuration of N+1 protection without the SD combination function.N+1
protection can work with SD combination. For the system configuration method, see 3.3.2 System
Configuration of the SD combination feature.

5+1 Protection (ACCP)

An IDU 950A can support only one 5+1 protection group. One 5+1 protection group uses six
channels and requires the following to be configured:
l Three ISM6 boards

l Six RFU-nonSDs
Figure 3-40 shows a typical 5+1 protection configuration. In this example:
l Figure 3-41 shows the channel configuration.

l To reduce interference between adjacent channels, the receive power of the eight
channels should be the same if possible. Therefore, the transmit power of the six
channels should be configured the same.
Figure 3-40 5+1 protection configuration (ACCP)
NOTE
Figure 3-41 Channel configuration of 5+1 protection (ACCP)

5+1 Protection (ACAP/CCDP)

An IDU 950A can support only one 5+1 protection group. For ACAP, one 5+1 protection
group uses six channels. For CCDP, one 5+1 protection group uses three channels. One 5+1
protection group requires the following to be configured:
l Three ISM6 boards
l Six RFU-nonSDs
l One dual-polarized antenna (supporting separate installation)
Figure 3-42 (ACAP/CCDP) show typical 5+1 protection configurations. In this example:
l It is recommended that channels be configured as shown in Figure 3-43 (ACAP) and
Figure 3-44 (CCDP).
l To reduce interference between adjacent channels, the receive power of the eight
channels should be the same if possible. Therefore, the transmit power of the eight
channels should be configured the same.
Figure 3-42 5+1 protection configuration (ACAP/CCDP)
Figure 3-43 Channel configuration of 5+1 protection (ACAP)

Figure 3-44 Channel configuration of 5+1 protection (CCDP)
3.5.2.2 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 2, Working with ODUs) Protection

The OptiX RTN 950A supports N+1 (N ≤ 7) protection configuration. This section describes
typical N+1 (N = 2) protection configurations supported by the OptiX RTN 950A.
System Configuration with XPIC Disabled

An IDU of the 950A supports a maximum of three N+1 (N = 2) protection groups. One N+1
(N = 2) protection group occupies three channels and requires that the following parts be
configured:
l Three single-IF boards
l Three ODUs
l One dual-polarized antenna that supports separate mounting (with one balanced hybrid
coupler)
NOTE
One dual-channel IF board can replace two single-IF board.
Considering single-IF boards as an example, Figure 3-45 shows a typical N+1 (N = 2)

protection configuration with XPIC disabled, wherein:
l The IF boards in slots 3 and 5 provide two working channels. The IF board in slot 6
provides one protection channel.
l The three channels are configured in ACAP mode, as shown in Figure 3-46.
l To reduce adjacent channel interference, the radio receive power of the three channels
need to be the same if possible. That is, the ODU transmit power for the two working
channels needs to be higher than the ODU transmit power for the protection channel and
the increment needs to exactly offset the extra loss caused by the hybrid coupler.

Figure 3-45 Typical N+1 (N = 2) protection configuration with XPIC disabled
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU
Working channel 1
Hybrid
coupler ODU
Protection channel
ODU
Working channel 2
CSHO
SLOT IF board IF board
11
(FAN) IF board
Figure 3-46 Typical channel configuration for N+1 (N = 2) protection with XPIC disabled
Working Working
channel 1 channel 2
Protection
channel
System Configuration with XPIC Enabled

An IDU of the 950A supports a maximum of three N+1 (N = 2) protection groups. One N+1
(N = 2) protection group occupies three channels and requires that the following parts be
configured:
l Three single-IF boards, including at least two XPIC IF boards
l Three ODUs
l One dual-polarized antenna that supports separate mounting (with one balanced hybrid
coupler)

NOTE
One dual-channel IF board can replace two single-IF boards that support the XPIC function.

protection configuration with XPIC enabled, wherein:
l The IF boards in slots 3 and 5 provide two working channels. The IF board in slot 6
l The XPIC IF boards in slots 5 and 6 are interconnected through XPIC cables so that they
can exchange XPIC cancellation signals.
l The three channels are configured as shown in Figure 3-48.
l To reduce adjacent channel interference, the radio receive power of the three channels
need to be the same if possible. That is, the ODU transmit power for the two working
channels needs to be higher than the ODU transmit power for the protection channel and
the increment needs to exactly offset the extra loss caused by the hybrid coupler.
Figure 3-47 Typical N+1 (N = 2) protection configuration with XPIC enabled
ODU
Working channel 1
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU
Working channel 2
Hybrid
coupler ODU
Protection channel
CSHO
SLOT XPIC IF board XPIC IF board
11
(FAN) IF board

Figure 3-48 Typical channel configuration for 2+1 protection with XPIC enabled
Working Working
channel 1 channel 2
Protection
channel
3.5.2.3 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 3, Working with ODUs) Protection

The OptiX RTN 950A supports N+1 (N ≤ 7) protection configuration. This section describes
typical N+1 (N = 3) protection configurations supported by the OptiX RTN 950A.
System Configuration with XPIC Disabled

An IDU of the 950A supports a maximum of two 3+1 protection group. One N+1 (N = 3)
protection group occupies four channels and requires that the following parts be configured:
l Four single-IF boards
l Four ODUs
l One dual-polarized antenna that supports separate mounting (with two balanced hybrid
couplers)
NOTE
One dual-channel IF board can replace two single-IF boards.
Considering single-IF boards as an example, Figure 3-49 shows a typical 3+1 protection
configuration with XPIC disabled, wherein:
l The IF boards in slots 3, 4, and 5 provide three working channels. The IF board in slot 6
l The four channels are configured in ACAP mode, as shown in Figure 3-50.
l To reduce adjacent channel interference, the radio receive power of the four channels
need to be the same if possible. You can set the ODU transmit power to the same value
for the four channels.

Figure 3-49 Typical N+1 (N = 3) protection configuration with XPIC disabled
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU ODU
Hybrid Hybrid
coupler coupler
ODU ODU
Working channel 2 Protection channel
CSHO
SLOT IF board IF board
11
(FAN) IF board IF board
Figure 3-50 Typical channel configuration for N+1 (N = 3) protection with XPIC disabled
Working Working
channel 1 channel 2
Protection Working
channel channel 3
System Configuration with XPIC Enabled

An IDU of the 950A supports a maximum of two 3+1 protection group. One N+1 (N = 3)
protection group occupies two channels and requires that the following parts be configured:
l Four XPIC single-IF boards

l Four ODUs
l One dual-polarized antenna that supports separate mounting (with two balanced hybrid
couplers)
NOTE
One dual-channel IF board can replace two single-IF boards that support the XPIC function.


protection configuration with XPIC enabled, wherein:
l The XPIC IF boards in slots 3, 4, and 5 provide three working channels. The XPIC IF
board in slot 6 provides one protection channel.
l The XPIC IF boards in slots 3 and 4 and the XPIC IF boards in slots 5 and 6 are
connected using XPIC cables so that two connected XPIC IF boards can exchange XPIC
cancellation signals.
l The four channels are configured as shown in Figure 3-52.
l To reduce adjacent channel interference, the radio receive power of the four channels
need to be the same if possible. You can set the ODU transmit power to the same value
for the two channels.
Figure 3-51 Typical N+1 (N = 3) protection configuration with XPIC enabled
Dual-polarized
antenna
ODU ODU
Hybrid Hybrid
coupler coupler
ODU ODU
Working channel 2 Protection channel
CSHO
SLOT XPIC IF board XPIC IF board
11
(FAN) XPIC IF board XPIC IF board

Figure 3-52 Typical channel configuration for N+1 (N = 3) protection with XPIC enabled
Working Working
channel 1 channel 2
Working Protection
channel 3 channel
3.5.2.4 Protection Mode

The protection type of N+1 protection is similar to the dual-ended revertive switching mode
of 1:N linear multiplex section protection.
The dual-ended revertive switching mode is described as follows:
l When a protection switching occurs, the services on the working channels in both
directions are switched to the protection channel.
l When an NE is in the switching state, the NE releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working
channel is restored to normal. The period from the time when the former working
channel is restored to normal to the time when the NE releases the switching is called the
wait-to-restore (WTR) time. To prevent frequent switching events due to an unstable
working channel, it is recommended that you set the WTR time to five to twelve
minutes.
3.5.2.5 Switching Condition

Similar to linear multiplex section protection, N+1 protection can be triggered by local SF
conditions, local SD conditions, locally external switching requests, and byte K sent from the
opposite NE.
NOTE
The switching conditions in Table 3-15 are listed in a descending order of priority.
Table 3-15 Switching conditions of the N+1 protection
Lockout of protection The lockout of protection blocks normal services from

channel (external switching) entering the protection channel but does not block services
from being switched from the protection channel to the
working channel. The SF condition on the protection
channel is equivalent to the lockout of protection.
Forced switching (external Services on the working channel are forcibly switched to
switching) the protection channel.

Signal failure (SF) The SF condition on the working channel enables services
to be switched to the protection channel.
l In the case of N+1 protection for the SDH microwave,
when there is the MW_LOF, R_LOC, R_LOF, R_LOS,
MS_AIS, or B2_EXC alarm on the working channel, the
SF switching is triggered.
l In the case of N+1 protection for the Integrated IP
microwave(Native E1+ETH), when there is the R_LOC,
R_LOF, MW_LOF, MW_BER_EXC alarm on the
working channel, the SF switching is triggered.
microwave(Native STM-1+ETH), when there is the
MW_LOF, R_LOC, R_LOF, MS_AIS, B2_EXC,
MW_BER_EXC alarm on the working channel, the SF
switching is triggered.
Signal degradation (SD) The SD condition on the working channel enables services
to be switched to the protection channel.
l In the case of N+1 protection for the SDH microwave,
when there is the B2_SD alarm on the working channel,
the SD switching is triggered.
microwave(Native E1+ETH), when there is the
MW_BER_SD alarm on the working channel, the SD
switching is triggered.
microwave(Native STM-1+ETH), when there is the
B2_SD, MW_BER_SD alarm on the working channel,
the SD switching is triggered.
Manual switching (external If a switching is in the lockout or forced switching state, or

switching) if the protection channel is faulty, no switching occurs.
Otherwise, the system switches services from the working
channel to the protection channel or from the protection
channel to the working channel according to the command.
The switching then changes to the manual switching state.
Revertive switching (valid After services are switched to the protection channel due to
only in revertive mode) the SF/SD condition on the working channel, the working
channel is already restored to normal, and the WTR time
expires, a revertive switching occurs. From the time the
working channel is restored to normal to the time the
revertive switching occurs, the switching is in WTR state.
After the revertive switching is complete, the switching
changes to the normal state.
Exercise switching (external services are not actually switched. The exercise
switching) functionality is used only to check whether an NE can
normally implement the N+1 protection protocol.

NOTE
l The SD is an optional switching condition. You can specify whether to use the SD as a switching
condition on the NMS. By default, the SD switching condition is used.
l If two switching conditions exist on a channel at the same time, the switching of a higher priority
preempts the channel.
l External switching commands include the following clear switching commands: clear lockout command,
clear forced switching command, clear manual switching command, clear exercise switching command,
clear WTR state command, and clear all command. The clear WTR state command is used to end the
current WTR state of the NE and to immediately switch services to the working channel. The clear all
command is used to clear all switching actions triggered by external switching commands and to clear the
WTR state.
l If an NE needs to perform the switching according to byte K sent from the NE at the opposite end, the NE
determines the switching priority according to the bridge request code contained in byte K.

The switching impacts of Integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave are different.
Switching Impact of the N+1 Protection (SDH Microwave)

The working TDM services are interrupted within the N+1 protection switching time (shorter
than 50 ms). The extra TDM services are interrupted from the time when the normal services
are switched to the protection channel to the time when the services are restored to the
working channel.
Switching Impact of the N+1 Protection (Integrated IP microwave)

l In the case of TDM services, the working TDM services are interrupted within the N+1
protection switching time (shorter than 50 ms). The extra TDM services are interrupted
from the time when the normal services are switched to the protection channel to the
time when the services are restored to the working channel.
l In the case of Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet and packet services), the
Ethernet services are interrupted within the air-interface LAG protection switching time
(shorter than 500 ms).
3.5.3 Principles
The principles for SDH microwave and Integrated IP microwave are different.
3.5.3.1 SDH Microwave

The N+1 protection switching for the SDH microwave is realized based on the automatic
bridging of the cross-connect unit.
This section describes the N+1 switching principle, with 2+1 protection configured on single-
IF boards of 3.5.2.2 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 2, Working with ODUs)
Protection as an example. The switching principles for the other types of N+1 protection are
the same as the switching principles for 2+1 protection.

Figure 3-53 2+1 protection principle (before a switchover)
Cross-connect Unit Service

ODU IF board Interface Unit
Antenna STM-1
(Normal Service 1)
STM-1
(Normal Service 2)
STM-1
(Extra Service)
NE 1
NE 2

Antenna STM-1
(Normal Service 1)
STM-1
(Normal Service 2)
STM-1
(Extra Service)
Figure 3-54 2+1 protection principle (after a switchover)

Antenna STM-1
(Normal Service 1)
STM-1
(Normal Service 2)
STM-1
(Extra Service)
NE 1
NE 2

Antenna STM-1
(Normal Service 1)
STM-1
(Normal Service 2)
STM-1
(Extra Service)

1. As shown in Figure 3-53, before switching, the NE sends and receives normal services
on the working channels, and sends and receives extra services on the protection
channel.
2. After detecting that the signals on the working channels fail, the IF board notifies the
system control and communication unit.
3. As shown in Figure 3-54, the system control and communication unit controls the cross-
connect unit to cross-connect the working services to the protection channel. The system
control and communication unit also interacts with the NE at the opposite end through
byte K to enable the NE at the opposite end to perform synchronous switching. In this
case, the extra services that are transmitted on the protection channel are interrupted.
NOTE
The interaction of byte K between NEs in the case of N+1 protection is similar to the 1:N MSP protocol.
For details, see 1:N LMSP.
3.5.3.2 Integrated IP microwave

In the case of N+1 protection for the Integrated IP microwave, the switching on the TDM
plane is realized based on the automatic bridging of the cross-connect unit and the switching
on the packet plane is realized based on the switching of the LAG.
NOTE
This section uses the Integrated IP microwave simultaneously transmitting Native TDM services and
Native Ethernet services as an example to describe the N+1 protection principle. When the Integrated IP
microwave transmits PWE3 services, the PWE3 service switching principle is the same as the Native
Ethernet service switching principle.
This section uses the cooperation between IF boards and ODUs as an example.
This section describes the 2+1 switching principle, with 2+1 protection configured on single-
IF boards of 3.5.2.2 System Configuration for N+1 (N = 2, Working with ODUs)
Protection as an example. The switching principles for the other types of N+1 protection are
the same as the switching principles for the 2+1 protection.

Figure 3-55 Realization principles of the 2+1 protection (before switching)

ODU IF board Cross-connect Unit Service Interface unit
TDM
(Normal Service 1)
TDM
(Normal Service 2)
Antenna ODU IF board
TDM
(Extra Service)
Ethernet
ODU IF board Packet switching Unit Service Interface unit
NE 1
NE 2
TDM
(Normal Service 1)
TDM
(Normal Service 2)
TDM
(Extra Service)
Ethernet

Figure 3-56 Realization principles of the 2+1 protection (after switching)

TDM
(Normal Service 1)
TDM
(Normal Service 2)
TDM
(Extra Service)
Ethernet
NE 1
NE 2
TDM
(Normal Service 1)
TDM
(Normal Service 2)
TDM
(Extra Service)
Ethernet
l In the case of TDM services, the switching principles of the N+1 protection for the
Integrated IP microwave are the same as the switching principles of the N+1 protection
for the SDH microwave. The switching on the TDM plane is realized based on the
automatic bridging of the cross-connect unit.
a. As shown in Figure 3-55, before switching, the NE sends and receives normal
services on the working channel, and sends and receives extra services on the
protection channel.
b. After detecting that the signals on a working channel fail, the IF board notifies the
c. As shown in Figure 3-56, the system control and communication unit controls the
cross-connect unit to cross-connect the working services to the protection channel.
The system control and communication unit also interacts with the NE at the
opposite end through byte K to enable the NE at the opposite end to perform
synchronous switching. In this case, the extra services that are transmitted on the
protection channel are interrupted.
l In the case of Ethernet services, N+1 protection for the Integrated IP microwave uses
LAG consisting of IF ports to implement switching on the packet plane
a. As shown in Figure 3-55, before switching, the LAG uses the load sharing mode to
allocate the service traffic to each link according to the result of the hash algorithm.

b. After detecting that the signals on a working channel fail, the IF board notifies the
c. As shown in Figure 3-56, the system control and communication unit control the
packet switching unit to allocate the service traffic from the failed link to the other
normal links according to the result of the hush algorithm. The system control and
communication unit also interacts with the NE at the opposite end through byte K to
enable the NE at the opposite end to perform synchronous switching.
NOTE
After an N+1 protection group is created on the U2000, the corresponding LAG of the IF ports is
automatically created. The default main port of the LAG is the Integrated IP microwave port on the first
working board in the N+1 protection group.
3.5.4 Reference Standards and Protocols

This section describes the standards and protocols associated with N+1 protection.
The N+1 protection protocol, a proprietary protocol stack of Huawei, is associated with N+1
protection. Parts of this protocol are based on the 1:N linear MSP protocol specified in ITU-T
G.841 "Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures."
This topic provides the specifications of N+1 protection.
Table 3-16 lists the specifications of N+1 protection.
Table 3-16 Specifications of N+1 protection

Item Specification
Radio link form SDH radio link

Integrated IP microwave link
Radio work mode IFU2 Integrated IP microwave

(Native E1 and Native
Ethernet)

Item Specification
ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 l Integrated IP microwave

(Native E1 and Native
Ethernet)
l Integrated IP microwave
(Native STM-1 and
Native Ethernet)
l SDH radio link:
– STM-1 radio: The
channel spacing is 28
MHz and the
modulation scheme is
128QAM.
– 2xSTM-1 radio: The
channel spacing is 56
MHz and the
modulation scheme is
128QAM.
Using a member link in an Supported

XPIC workgroup as a
member in an N+1
protection group
Protection switching TDM services: less than 50 ms

duration Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet and packet
services): less than 500 ms
WTR time 300 seconds to 720 seconds
3.5.6 Availability
run the N+1 protection feature.
N+1 protection IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)

This section provides a history of N+1 protection updates.

Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 N+1 protection was first available in this version.
V100R007C00 N+1 protection and orderwire can work together.
V100R008C10 The OptiX RTN 950A supports the cooperation between

ISM6 boards and RFUs to implement N+1 protection.

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of N+1 protection.
Self-limitations

Item Description
Configuration requirements l The service capacity, modulation scheme, and channel

spacing must be consistently set for members in an N+1
protection group of the SDH radio.
l The IF service type, running mode, Ethernet header
compression mode, TDM service amount, channel
spacing, and modulation scheme must be consistently
set for members in an N+1 protection group of the
Integrated IP microwave.
l If ISV3 boards and ISX2/ISU2 boards form an N+1
protection group, the ISV3 boards must work in IS2
mode.
l E-LAN services are not supported when a dual-channel
IF board and single-IF board form an N+1 protection
group.
l If an IF port on an ISM6 board is a member of an N+1
protection group and is configured with more than 63
E1s, the other IF port on the ISM6 board must not be
configured with E1 services.

Dependencies and Limitations Between N+1 protection and Other Features
Table 3-18 Dependencies and limitations between N+1 protection and other features
Feature Description
ATPC The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) parameters,

such as ATPC status (enabled or disabled) and ATPC
adjustment thresholds, must be consistently set for members
in an N+1 protection group.
AM l The adaptive modulation (AM) status (enabled or

disabled) must be the same for all members in an N+1
protection group.
l If the AM feature is disabled for all members in an N+1
protection group, the modulation scheme must be
consistently set for all these members.
l If the AM feature is enabled for all members in an N+1
protection group, the modulation scheme of the
guaranteed AM capacity, modulation scheme of the full
AM capacity, and guaranteed E1 capacity must be
consistently set for all these members.
l E1 priority status (enabled or disabled) must be the same
for all members in an N+1 protection group.
l If E1 priority is enabled for all members in an N+1
protection group, full E1 capacity must be consistently
set for all these members.
l If the AM feature is enabled on the Integrated IP
microwave links of an N+1 protection group, the
standby link uses the original modulation scheme after
protection switching.
LAG When a standard N+1 protection group is being created for

an Integrated IP microwave link on an NE, the NE
automatically creates an EPLA. In the EPLA, the master
port is a Integrated IP microwave port on the first working
board by default.
XPIC Members of an XPIC group that consists of ISX2/ISV3/

ISM6 boards can be configured into an N+1 protection
group. Note that members in an XPIC group can be
configured into only the same N+1 protection group.
Inband DCN The protocol type of the inband DCN must be the same for
all members in an N+1 protection group.
Synchronous data service/ A member in an N+1 protection group can be configured

asynchronous data service/ with a maximum of two types of services among the
orderwire phone service synchronous data services, asynchronous data services, and
orderwire phone services.
AES-based encryption at air An AES_MAC_ERR alarm will trigger N+1 switching.

interfaces

Features That Conflict with N+1 protection

l 1+1 HSB/SD/FD
l Super Dual Band

This section provides the guidelines to be followed when you plan N+1 protection.
l If services that need to be transmitted over a radio link between two stations are more
than the capacity of one channel and the radio link needs to be protected, you can adopt
N+1 protection. For a radio link that transmits only Ethernet services, it is recommended
that you use air-interface LAG protection or EPLA instead of N+1 protection.
l Ensure that channels in SDH radio mode use the same channel spacing, modulation
scheme, and air-interface capacity.
l Ensure that channels in Integrated IP microwave mode use the same channel spacing,
modulation scheme, TDM service capacity at air interfaces, Ethernet services capacity at
air interfaces, and capacity-related parameters (including AM parameters and E1 priority
parameters).
l It is recommended that the slot ID for the IF board providing the protection channel be
larger than that for the IF board providing the working channel.
l It is recommended that you set the WTR to 10 minutes.
l It is recommended that you set SD as a switching condition.
3.5.10 Relevant Alarms and Performance Events

When an N+1 protection switching occurs, the IF board reports corresponding alarms.
Relevant Alarms
l NP1_SW_INDI
The NP1_SW_INDI alarm indicates the N+1 protection switching.
l NP1_SW_FAIL
The NP1_SW_FAIL alarm indicates that the N+1 protection switching fails.
l NP1_MANUAL_STOP
The NP1_MANUAL_STOP alarm indicates that the protection protocol is manually
stopped.

N+1 protection switching
This performance event indicates that the N+1 protection switching occurs.
3.5.11 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when N+1 protection is used.

Q: What switching states does the N+1 protection have?

A: The N+1 protection has the following switching states:
l Protocol not started
The state when the N+1 protection protocol is not started
l Protocol starting
The state when the N+1 protection protocol is being started
l Protocol normal
The normal state after the N+1 protection protocol is started
l Lockout
The state after the protection channel is locked out
l Forced
The state after a forced switching
l Manual
The state after a manual switching
l Exercise
The state after an exercise switching
l Signal failure
The state after an SF switching
l Signal degrade
The state after an SD switching
l WTR
The state that lasts from the time the working equipment is restored to normal after an
automatic switching to the time the revertive switching occurs in the revertive mode
Q: Why cannot the forced switching be performed when the signal on the protection
channel fails?
A: After the signal on the protection channel fails, the protection channel is locked out. The
lockout of the protection channel has a higher priority than the forced switching. Hence, the
forced switching cannot be performed.
Q: Why does the creation of an N+1 protection group fail?

A: Common causes are as follows:
l The radio work mode of the IF board is not configured.
l In the case of the SDH microwave, the radio work mode of the IF board is not the
STM-1 mode.
l In an N+1 protection group, the IF service mode of the member ports differs.
l The microwave port attributes or licensed capacities of IF boards are inconsistent.
Q: What is the method of handling an N+1 protection switching failure?

A: Check whether the protection channel is normal or whether the protection channel is
already used to protect other services.

l If alarms are generated on the protection channel, analyze the fault causes according to
the alarms and rectify the faults.
l If the protection channel is already used to protect other services, rectify the faults in the
other services so that the protection channel can be released to idle state.
Q: If more than one working channel in an N+1 protection group fails, which working
channel will be protected by the protection channel?
A: The working channel with the highest priority as specified in Mapped Board will be
protected.
3.6 ATPC
The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function is an important function of a radio
transmission system. The ATPC function reduces the interference of a transmitter to adjacent
systems and the residual bit error rate.
3.6.1 Introduction
This section defines automatic transmit power control (ATPC) and describes the purpose of
using this feature.
Definition
ATPC is a method of adjusting transmit power based on the fading of transmit signal detected
at the receiver.
When the ATPC function is enabled, the following conditions are possible:
l If the receive signal level (RSL) at the receiver is 2 dB lower than the central value of the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold, the receiver notifies the
transmitter of an increase in the transmit power. Therefore, the RSL can be within the
value range that has a bias of ±2 dB from the central value of the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold. See Figure 3-57.
NOTE
l If the actual transmit power of the ODU/RFU reaches the preset maximum transmit power
whereas the RSL at the receiver fails to be within the value range that has a bias of ±2 dB from
the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold, adjustments are
no longer made.
l The preset maximum transmit power of the ODU/RFU should not be more than the rated
maximum transmit power of the ODU/RFU.
l If the maximum transmit power of the ODU/RFU is not set, the transmit power of the
ODU/RFU can increase at most to the rated maximum transmit power of the ODU/RFU.
l If the RSL at the receiver is 2 dB higher than the central value of the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold, the receiver notifies the transmitter of a
decrease in the transmit power. Therefore, the RSL can be within the value range that has
a bias of ±2 dB from the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold. See Figure 3-57.

Figure 3-57 Relationship between the RSL and TSL
TSL/RSL
TSL
Up-fading
Central value of the 2 dB
ATPC upper RSL
threshold and the
2 dB
ATPC lower threshold
Down-fading
Purpose
The ATPC technology enables a transmitter to automatically change its output power within
the ATPC control range based on the change in the RSL of a receiver. In this way, the RSL of
the receiver remains in a fixed range, and the interference with the neighboring system and
the residual error rate are reduced.
3.6.2 Principles
The ATPC function uses the ATPC overhead in a microwave frame.

Figure 3-58 Realization principle of the ATPC

Transmitter Receiver
RSL not within the value

range that has a bias of ±2
Microwave frame (ATPC overhead dB from the central valu e of
the ATPC upper threshold
indicates power adjustment and and ATPC lower threshold
adjustment step)
RSL not within the value

Adjust the power range that has a bias of ±2
........... dB from the central valu e of
once according to the the ATPC upper threshold
ATPC adjustment step and ATPC lower threshold
Microwave frame (ATPC overhead
indicates power adjustment and
adjustment step)
Adjust the power RSL within the value range

that has a bias of ±2 dB
once according to the ........... from the central valu e of the
ATPC adjustment step ATPC upper threshold and
ATPC lower threshold
Microwave frame (ATPC overhead
indicates no adjustments to the
transmit power)
...........
The realization principle is as follows:

1. The receiver detects the received signal level (RSL).
2. When the ATPC function is enabled, and if the RSL is not within the value range that has
a bias of ±2 dB from the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold, the receiver determines the power adjustment type and adjustment step
according to the difference between the RSL and the central value of the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. In addition, the receiver sets the ATPC
overhead to inform the transmitter of the power adjustment type and adjustment step.
3. The transmitter adjusts the transmit power of the ODU/RFU.
NOTE
When the transmit power of the ODU/RFU reaches the preset value of the maximum transmit
power of the ODU/RFU, the transmitter does not increase the transmit power of the ODU/RFU
any longer.
4. If the receiver detects that the RSL is still not within the value range that has a bias of 2
dB from the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold,
the system repeats steps 2 and 3 until the RSL is within the value range that has a bias of
2 dB from the central value.

NOTE
l When the difference between the RSL and the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold is less than 12 dB, one ATPC adjustment can meet the requirement
for the transmit power if the interference due to fast fading does not exist. Otherwise, several
ATPC adjustments are required.
l If the number of ATPC adjustments reaches the maximum number but the difference between
the RSL and the central value of the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is
more than 2 dB, the system starts new ATPC adjustments after a certain period.
This section describes the specifications of ATPC.
Table 3-19 lists the specifications of ATPC.
Table 3-19 Specifications of ATPC
Item Specifications
ATPC control range The upper threshold is the maximum

transmit power of ODUs/RFUs.
The lower threshold is the minimum
transmit power of ODUs/RFUs.
ATPC adjustment step Automatic adjustment based on the

difference between the RSL and the central
value of the ATPC upper threshold and the
ATPC lower threshold. The maximum
adjustment step is 10 dB at a time.
ATPC adjustment speed > 30 dB/s
Maximum transmit power of ODUs/RFUs Supported
3.6.4 Availability
run the automatic transmit power control (ATPC) feature.
ATPC IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)

This section provides a history of ATPC updates.

Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 ATPC was first available in this version.

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of the automatic transmit power
control (ATPC) feature.
Self-limitations
None
Dependencies and Limitations Between ATPC and Other Features
Table 3-20 Dependencies and limitations between ATPC and other features
Feature Description
N+1 The ATPC parameters, such as ATPC status (enabled or

consistently set for members in an N+1 protection group.
XPIC XPIC can work with automatic transmit power control

(ATPC). However, it is not recommended that you use the
two functions together. When using the two functions
together, pay attention to the following points:
l The ATPC parameters, such as ATPC status (enabled or
consistently set for links in the horizontal and vertical
l The difference between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold must be minimized (5 dB is
recommended).
AM AM can work with ATPC. However, it is not recommended

that you use the two functions together. When using the two
functions together, pay attention to the following points:
l The ATPC lower threshold must be greater than the
receiver sensitivity in AM full capacity mode plus 14
dB.
l The ATPC upper threshold must be 5 dB greater than the
ATPC lower threshold.
l The AM booster function must be disabled.

Feature Description
SD combination The one with higher power between the main and diversity
signals is valid. If the RSL value of the signal deviates from
the ATPC center threshold for 2 dB, the NE performs ATPC
adjustment.
Features That Conflict with ATPC

None

This section provides the guidelines to be followed when you plan ATPC.
l Set ATPC parameters to the same for both ends of a radio hop.
l It is recommended that you disable the ATPC function for areas where fast fading is
severe.
l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to
a value being equal to the expected receive power.
l Ensure that the difference between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is equal to or more than 5 dB.
l Set the maximum transmit power of the ODU/RFU if required.
l It is recommended that you disable the automatic ATPC threshold function.

When the ATPC adjustment occurs, the ODU/RFU reports the relevant performance events.
Relevant Alarms
None.

l TLHTT
The duration when the ODU/RFU at the local end has a transit power higher than the
upper threshold.
l TLLTT
The duration when the ODU/RFU at the local end has a transit power higher than the
lower threshold.
l RLHTT
The duration when the ODU/RFU at the local end has a receive power lower than the
upper threshold.
l RLLTT
The duration when the ODU/RFU at the local end has a receive power lower than the
lower threshold.

l ATPC_P_ADJUST
The ATPC_P_ADJUST indicates the positive ATPC adjustment event.
l ATPC_N_ADJUST
The ATPC_N_ADJUST indicates the negative ATPC adjustment event.
3.6.9 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when ATPC is used.
Q: Why is the RSL sometimes more than 2 dB higher or lower than the central value of
the ATPC threshold range, when the ATPC function is enabled?
A: Major causes may be as follows:
l The ATPC adjustment speed is lower than the instantaneous fading speed.
This ATPC adjustment speed may be lower than the instantaneous speed of certain
fading. In this case, the transmit power adjusted by the ATPC function fails to offset the
fading in a timely manner. The RSL is more than 2 dB higher or lower than the central
value of the ATPC threshold range.
l The transmit power reaches the threshold of the ATPC control range, and cannot be
increased or decreased.
3.7 AM
The adaptive modulation (AM) function is a main characteristics in Integrated IP
microwavemode.
3.7.1 Introduction
This section defines adaptive modulation (AM) and describes the purpose of using this
feature.
Definition
The AM function helps to adjust the modulation scheme based on the quality of channels.
After the AM technology is used, at the same channel spacing, the microwave service
bandwidth varies with the modulation scheme. The higher the modulation efficiency, the
higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services.
l When the channel quality is satisfactory (such as on days weather conditions are
favorable), the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit more
user services. In this manner, the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of
the system are improved.
l When the channel quality deteriorates (such as on days there is a storm or fog), the
equipment adopts a low-efficiency mode to transmit only the services with a high-
efficiency priority within the available bandwidth and to discard the services with a
lower priority. In this manner, the anti-interference capability of the radio link is
improved and the link availability of the services with a high-efficiency priority is
ensured.
The Integrated IP microwave equipment supports the AM technology, in which the priorities
of E1 services and packet services can be set. With the AM technology used, service

transmission is controlled based on the service bandwidth and QoS policy corresponding to
the current modulation scheme. The service with the highest priority is transmitted with
preference.
NOTE
When the Integrated IP microwave equipment transmits STM-1 services and packet services at the same
time, STM-1 services have the highest priority and their transmission is guaranteed.
l E1 service priority
The E1 service priority is assigned based on the number of E1 services that each
modulation scheme can transmit. When a shift between modulation schemes occurs, only
the E1 services whose number is specified in the new modulation scheme can be
transmitted and excess E1 services are discarded.
l Packet service priority
Through the QoS technology, packet services are scheduled to queues with different
priorities. Then, the services in different queues are transmitted to the microwave port
based on different queue scheduling algorithms. When a shift between modulation
schemes occurs, certain queues may be congested due to insufficient capacity at the air
interface. In this case, certain services or all the services in these queues are discarded.
Figure 3-59 shows the change of service capacity when the AM modulation scheme changes
from QPSK to 256QAM (six modulation schemes). The orange part indicates E1 services.
The blue part indicates packet services. The closer to the edge, the lower the service priority.
Under all channel conditions, the service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme.
When the channel is in bad conditions, services with lower priorities are discarded.
Figure 3-59 Adaptive modulation
256QAM
128QAM
64QAM
32QAM
16QAM
QPSK
16QAM
Channel
Capability 32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
E1 Services
256QAM
Ethernet
Services

Purpose
After a radio link adopts the AM technology, the availability of links for services with higher
priorities is ensured and the bandwidth utilization is improved.

AM feature.
3.7.2.1 E1 Service Priority

The OptiX RTN 950A allows the setting of priorities for native E1 services over Integrated IP
microwave (Native E1 and Native Ethernet) and discards the native E1 services with low
priorities in guarantee capacity modulation mode.
Application Scenario
The conventional Hybrid radio assumes that all native E1 services are high-priority services,
such as voice services. No E1 services can be impaired when the AM mode is downshifted.
This assumption, however, does not apply to the Hybrid radio that transmits IMA E1 services.
An IMA E1 group includes high-priority services such as voice services and low-priority
services such as webpage browsing services. When the AM mode is downshifted, high-
priority services are not impaired if the IMA group bandwidth in the lower order modulation
mode is higher than the bandwidth requirement of high-priority services. For this purpose, E1
service priorities are introduced. By default, after E1 service priorities are used, different
types of services occupy the service bandwidth in a descending order of priorities: high-
priority E1 services/high-priority Ethernet services > low-priority E1 services > low-priority
Ethernet services. The priorities can be manually modified. The requirement for E1 guarantee
capacity decreases and a lower order modulation mode can meet this requirement, improving
the link availability.
Figure 3-60 shows an example of the priorities of E1 services. In this radio transmission
network:
l The Hybrid radio uses a channel spacing of 7MHz.

l The R99 base station transmits an IMA group of 7xE1 services.
l The R4 base station transmits FE services.
l Table 3-21 lists the priorities of base station services.
Table 3-21 Priorities of services at base stations

BTS Type Service Priority Service Bandwidth
R99 High-priority service 4 Mbit/s
Low-priority service 10 Mbit/s
R4 High-priority service 4 Mbit/s
Low-priority service 10 Mbit/s

Figure 3-60 Applications of E1 Service Priority

Integrated IP
radio
IMA
IMA
…
…
R99 NodeB FE FE
RNC
R4 NodeB
In the case of the Hybrid radio:

l If the E1 service priorities are not set
The guarantee capacity is higher than 18 Mbit/s (including all E1 services on R99 and
the high-priority Ethernet services on R4). The corresponding modulation mode is
16QAM.
l If E1 service priorities are set
The guarantee capacity is higher than 8 Mbit/s (including the high-priority E1 services
on R99 and the high-priority Ethernet services on R4). The corresponding modulation
mode is QPSK.
The comparison indicates that the setting of E1 service priorities lowers the guarantee
capacity and the corresponding modulation mode, therefore improving the link availability.
Features
On the OptiX RTN 950A, the setting of E1 service priorities have the following features:
l E1 service priorities can be set to either High or Low.
– The transmission of high-priority E1 services is guaranteed in any modulation
mode.
– The transmission of low-priority E1 services is guaranteed only in full-capacity
modulation modes.
l The attributes of E1 service priorities are achieved on IF boards, but the configuration of
E1 service priorities is achieved through cross-connections.
l On the OptiX RTN 950A, you can set the number of E1 services that are guaranteed in
medium modulation mode. However, you cannot specify which low-priority E1 services
are discarded and which are not discarded in this modulation mode.
l By default, on the OptiX RTN 950A, the E1 guarantee capacity subtracted from the
guarantee capacity is the bandwidth available for high-priority Ethernet services. In other
modulation modes, the Ethernet service bandwidth cannot be lower than this value.
Hence the formula: E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth
in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full
capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of
E1 services in full capacity modulation mode.
For example, on the Figure 3-60, the guarantee capacity modulation mode is QPSK
(corresponding to a service capacity of 10 Mbit/s) and the full capacity modulation mode

is 64QAM (corresponding to a service capacity of 32 Mbit/s). The number of E1 services

in guarantee capacity modulation mode is 2 (corresponding to a service capacity of 4
Mbit/s), so the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode is (32
- 10 + 4)/2 = 13.
3.7.2.2 Ethernet Service Priority

The OptiX RTN 950A can schedule Ethernet services with different priorities through QoS.
Ethernet services supported by the equipment are Native Ethernet services and PWE3
services.
When the AM is enabled on an OptiX RTN 950A, the Ethernet services with different
priorities can be scheduled as follows:
When an AM shift occurs, the IF board or packet switching unit performs shaping based on
the Ethernet bandwidth provided by the radio link in the current modulation scheme to limit
the rate of transmitting services to the microwave port. When service congestion occurs, the
IF board or packet switching unit schedules Ethernet packets based on the configured queue
scheduling algorithm. In this manner, Ethernet services are scheduled smoothly. Low-priority
Ethernet services that cannot be scheduled are discarded.
3.7.2.3 AM booster
The adaptive modulation (AM) Boost function increases the transmit power of an ODU by 1
to 3 dB when IF boards are working in AM full capacity mode. As a result, the fading margin
and working time of radio links also increase.
If AM is not enabled, interference is analyzed based on the spectrum templates in various
modulation schemes when frequencies for radio links are planned and designed. If the
spectrum in a modulation scheme spreads beyond the defined spectrum template, interference
to other channels may be stronger than the estimated interference.
If AM is enabled, interference is analyzed based on the spectrum template in AM guaranteed
capacity mode when frequencies for radio links are planned and designed. In this manner,
interference to other channels will not be stronger than the estimated interference, as long as
the spectrum in AM full capacity mode is not wider than the spectrum template in AM
guaranteed capacity mode. In other words, the transmit power in AM full capacity mode is not
restricted by the spectrum template in AM full capacity mode. Therefore, you can increase the
transmit power as required in AM full capacity mode. This function is called AM booster.
As shown in Figure 3-61, the AM booster function increases the transmit power in AM full
capacity mode, and therefore increases the fading margin, working time, and average
bandwidth of radio links in AM full capacity mode.
The AM booster function has the following features:
l The transmit power in AM full capacity mode increases only when the AM guaranteed
capacity mode is QPSK, 16QAM, or 32QAM and the AM full capacity mode is 64QAM,
128QAM, or 256QAM.
l The transmit power can increase only when IF boards are working in AM full capacity
mode, but cannot increase when IF boards are working at any of the step intervals.

Figure 3-61 Diagram of spectrum templates

Spectrum template in AM guaranteed capacity mode
Spectrum template in AM full capacity mode
Spectrum in AM full capacity mode (AM booster enable)

Spectrum in AM full capacity mode (AM booster ddisabled)
Transmit power
Transmit power
Fading Fading
margin margin
Modulation scheme shift threshold

Modulation scheme shift threshold
3.7.3 Principles
The AM function is implemented mainly by the AM engine in the Modem unit of an IF board.
This section describes how AM is implemented using service transmission from NE1
(transmitter) to NE2 (receiver) as an example.
AM Implementation Principles (Before a Shift)

1. As shown in Figure 3-62, the MUX unit of the transmitter multiplexes a service that is
scheduled to the microwave port into a microwave frame. The microwave frame is then
transmitted to the receiver over the Tx path.
2. The Rx path receives and processes the received IF signal and checks the quality of the
received signal based on the received signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).

NOTE
In the current modulation scheme, the quality of the received signal is considered deteriorating if
the SNR is lower than the preset threshold, and the quality of the received signal is considered
good if the SNR is higher than the preset threshold.
3. The Rx path transmits a signal indicating the quality of the received signal to the AM
engine of the receiver.
4. The AM engine sends a shift indication signal, which is contained in a microwave frame,
to the transmitter over the Tx path.
5. When processing the received IF signal, the Modem unit of the transmitter extracts the
shift indication signal and sends it to the AM engine.
6. The AM engine sends the shift indication signal to the MUX unit, instructing the MUX
unit, Modem unit, and RF unit to shift the modulation scheme after N frames are
transmitted. In addition, the transmitter inserts the shift indication signal into a
microwave frame transmitted to the receiver.
7. After the receiver detects the shift indication signal in the received microwave frame, the
MUX unit, Modem unit, and RF unit of the receiver also shift the modulation scheme
after N frames are received. In this manner, the modulation scheme shift is implemented
at both the transmitter and receiver based on the frame boundary.
Figure 3-62 AM shift (before the shift)
Modem Modem
Microwave Microwave
MUX frame frame MUX
unit Tx Path Rx Path unit
INDI SNR
AM
AM Messages AM
Engine Engine
INDI INDI
MUX
MUX Tx Path
Rx Path unit
unit Microwave Microwave
frame frame
NE1 NE2
Low priority service INDI:Modulation scheme indication signal
High priority service SNR:signal to noise ratio
AM Implementation Principles (After a Downshift)

When detecting that the received SRN is lower than the threshold for triggering a modulation
scheme downshift, the Modem unit of the receiver instructs the transmitter to perform a
downshift. After the downshift, the bandwidth for microwave frames decreases. The
transmitter discards lower-priority Ethernet services based on available bandwidth and
schedules higher-priority Ethernet services to the microwave port. See Figure 3-63.

NOTE
l After the modulation scheme shifts to the lowest one, only higher-priority Ethernet services are
transmitted.
l After the modulation scheme downshifts, the transmit power changes to the lower one between the
rated maximum transmit power and the preset transmit power.
Figure 3-63 AM downshift (after the shift)
Modem Modem
Microwave Microwave
MUX frame frame MUX
INDI SNR
AM
AM Messages AM
Engine Engine
INDI INDI
MUX
MUX Tx Path
Rx Path unit
frame frame
NE1 NE2
High priority service

SNR:signal to noise ratio
AM Implementation Principles (After an Upshift)

When detecting that the received SRN is higher than the threshold for triggering a modulation
scheme upshift, the Modem unit of the receiver instructs the transmitter to perform an upshift.
After the upshift, the bandwidth for microwave frames increases, and more Ethernet services
can be transmitted. See Figure 3-64.
NOTE
l After the modulation scheme shifts to the highest one, Ethernet services are transmitted using
available bandwidth.
l After the modulation scheme upshifts, the transmit power changes to the rated maximum transmit
power of the current modulation scheme if the transmit power before the upshift is higher than the
rated maximum transmit power of the current modulation scheme.

Figure 3-64 AM upshift (after the shift)
Modem Modem
Microwave Microwave
MUX frame frame MUX
INDI SNR
AM
AM Messages AM
Engine Engine
INDI INDI
MUX
MUX Tx Path
Rx Path unit
frame frame
NE1 NE2
High priority service SNR:signal to noise ratio
This section describes the specifications of AM.
Table 3-22 lists the specifications of AM.
Table 3-22 Specifications of AM
Item Specifications
Supported radio IFU2 Integrated IP microwave(Native E1 and Native

types Ethernet)
ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ l Integrated IP microwave(Native E1 and

ISM6 Native Ethernet)
l Integrated IP microwave (Native STM-1
and Native Ethernet)
Impact of scheme shift When the modulation scheme is shifted, the

transmit frequency, receive frequency, and
channel spacing are not changed.
When the modulation scheme is downshifted,
high-priority services will not be affected when
the low-priority services are discarded.
Shift mode Step by step

Item Specifications
Shift speed Meeting the requirement of the fast fading at a

speed of 100 dB/s
E1 priority Supported radio Integrated IP microwave(Native E1+Eth)

types
Supported Two levels

priority levels
AM booster Supported board ISX2
Supported The AM guaranteed capacity mode is QPSK,

modulation 16QAM, or 32QAM and the AM full capacity
scheme mode is 64QAM, 128QAM, or 256QAM.
Supported 7/14/28/56 MHz

bandwidth
Transmit power 1-3 dB

increment range
3.7.5 Availability
run the adaptive modulation (AM) feature.
Feature Name Board Type
AM IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)
E1 service priority IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)
AM Booster ISX2 (IF port)

This section provides a history of the adaptive modulation (AM) updates.
Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 AM was first available in this version.
V100R007C00 The ISV3 board in IS3 mode supports 2048QAM in this

version.

Version Description
V100R007C10 The ISM6 board in IS6 mode supports 4096QAM in this

version.
V100R008C00 With a channel spacing of 3.5 MHz, an ISV3 starts to

support the AM feature only when running in IS3 mode.

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of adaptive modulation (AM).
Self-limitations

Item Description
E1 service priority Enable AM before enabling the E1 service priority.
QoS If the AM feature is enabled, configuring quality of service

(QoS) for Ethernet services transmitted by Integrated IP
microwave is recommended. When a radio link works in a
lower-order modulation scheme, QoS allocates available
bandwidth so that higher-priority Ethernet services are
transmitted first.
Channel bandwidth With a channel spacing of 3.5 MHz, an ISV3 supports the
AM feature only when running in IS3 mode.
2048QAM modulation l If the modulation scheme of full AM capacity is

scheme (IS3 mode) 2048QAM, 2048QAM is shifted to 1024QAM or
1024QAM is shifted to 2048QAM directly instead of
through 1024QAM light.
AM booster l AM booster and automatic transmit power control

(ATPC) cannot work together.
l The AM booster function is available only when XMC
ODUs are used.

Dependencies and Limitations Between AM and Other Features
Table 3-24 Dependencies and limitations between AM and other features

Feature Description
N+1 AM can work with N+1 protection. In this case, AM

parameters must be consistently set for members in the N+1
protection group. When the AM function is used with N+1
protection, the members must be enabled or disabled with
E1 service priority simultaneously. When the E1 service
priority is enabled, the maximum E1 capacity must be
consistently set for the members.
XPIC Cross polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) can

work with AM. However, it is not recommended that you
use the two functions together. When using the two
functions together, ensure that the AM parameters are
consistently set for the links in the horizontal and vertical
ATPC AM can work with ATPC. However, it is not recommended

that you use the two functions together. When using the two
functions together, pay attention to the following points:
l The ATPC lower threshold must be greater than the
receiver sensitivity in AM full capacity mode plus 14
dB.
l The ATPC upper threshold must be 5 dB greater than the
ATPC lower threshold.
l The AM booster function must be disabled.
LAG Microwave ports that support AM can be configured into a

LAG at air interfaces. The AM attribute and E1 priority
must be set to the same values for the IF ports in a LAG.
Features That Conflict with AM

None

Follow certain guidelines when you plan AM.
Planning Guidelines on the AM Enabling Status

l If all types of services transmitted on a radio link need to meet same availability
requirements, it is recommended that you disable the AM function. Instead, use a fixed
modulation scheme according to the availability requirement and the maximum service
capacity.
l If all types of services transmitted on a radio link do not need to meet same availability
requirements (that is, some bandwidths are wasted or some E1 packets are discarded if

the transmission condition is unfavorable), it is recommended that you enable the AM

function.
Planning Guidelines on AM Attributes

l The air-interface bandwidth in the modulation scheme of guaranteed AM capacity must
be higher than the total bandwidth of high-priority services, and the link availability
should meet the availability requirement of high-priority services.
l The air-interface bandwidth in the modulation scheme of full AM capacity must be
higher than the total bandwidth of all services, and the link availability should meet the
availability requirement of low-priority services.
Planning Guidelines on E1 Priority

l If Hybrid radio transmits IMA services, E1 priority can be enabled. In this scenario,
ensure that the guaranteed E1 capacity is equal to that required by high-priority IMA
services, and the full E1 capacity is equal to that required by all IMA services.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, ensure that the following requirement is met: Full
E1 service bandwidth ≤ Full service bandwidth - Guaranteed service bandwidth +
Guaranteed E1 service bandwidth.
l The priority of an E1 service is specified during the configuration of cross-connections
and is irrelevant to the used timeslot on the IF board. The E1 service priority function
can be set to either High or Low.
l The priority of an E1 service must be the same over hops of radio link.

When the AM shift occurs, an IF board reports the relevant alarms and performance events.
Relevant Alarms
l AM_DOWNSHIFT
The AM_DOWNSHIFT indicates an AM downshift. This alarm is reported when an AM
downshift occurs and an alarm is desired upon an AM downshift.
l MW_CFG_MISMATCH
The MW_CFG_MISMATCH indicates a configuration mismatch of a radio link. This
alarm occurs when an NE detects configuration mismatch on both ends of a radio link.
For example, the number of E1 signals, the number of STM-1 signals, AM enabling,
1588 overhead enabling, modulation scheme is configured differently on both ends of a
radio link.
l MW_E1_LOST
The MW_E1_LOST indicates E1 lost. This alarm occurs when the AM modulation
scheme downshifts or the E1 bandwidth decreases in the current modulation scheme in
the case that the E1 priority function is enabled.
l MW_AM_TEST
The MW_AM_TEST alarm indicates that an IF port is in the AM testing state.

l The QPSK_S_WS event indicates the working duration of the QPSK Strong modulation
scheme.

l The QPSKWS event indicates the working duration of the QPSK modulation scheme.
l The QAM_S_WS16 event indicates the working duration of the 16QAM Strong
modulation scheme.
l The QAMWS16 event indicates the working duration of the 16QAM modulation
scheme.
scheme.
scheme.
scheme.
scheme.
scheme.
l The QAM_L_WS512 event indicates the working duration of the 512QAM Light
modulation scheme.
scheme.
l The QAM_L_WS1024 event indicates the working duration of the 1024QAM Light
modulation scheme.
scheme.
scheme.
l The AMDOWNCNT event indicates the number of AM downshifts in the current
performance statistics period.
l The AMUPCNT event indicates the number of AM upshifts in the current performance
statistics period.
3.7.10 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when AM is used.
Q: What is the method of handling the failure of the AM shift?
A: The possible symptoms of a shift failure are as follows:
l Bit errors occur after a shift.

l A shift is not triggered when the shift conditions are met or a shift is triggered when the
switching conditions are not met.
The possible causes of a shift failure are as follows:
l The AM function is disabled.

When the AM function is disabled, the radio link uses a fixed modulation scheme.
Ethernet services cannot be transmitted flexibly.
l The transmit power of the ODU/RFU is manually adjusted by more than 3 dB.

If the transmit power of the ODU/RFU is manually adjusted by more than 3 dB at one
time, it is equivalent to the result when the rate of fast fading is more than 100 dB/s. In
this case, bit errors may occur during a shift.
l The user incorrectly considers that the receiver sensitivity is associated with the AM
shift.
An AM shift is realized through the detection of the SNR other than the detection of the
RSL. If the SNR exceeds the specified threshold, the AM shift occurs though the RSL is
higher than the receiver sensitivity.
l The ATPC function and the AM function cannot work properly together.
– When the ATPC function is enabled, the transmit power cannot be the maximum
transmit power if the upper ATPC adjustment threshold is set incorrectly. As a
result, the improvement to the SNR of the radio link is affected and the AM upshift
fails.
– An ATPC adjustment with a higher rate and a larger step results in less stability of
the AM shift.
The ATPC function and the AM function may affect each other when working together.
Therefore, it is recommended that you disable the ATPC function when the AM function
is enabled.
Q: For an NE that has fixed optical transmit power, why does the ODU/RFU's actual
transmit power vary between the fixed value and several smaller values when the AM
function is enabled?
A: The ODU/RFU's rated maximum transmit power differs with its modulation scheme.
Upshifting the modulation scheme will result in a smaller rated maximum transmit power.
When the AM function is enabled, the ODU/RFU's transmit power is set to a value within the
rated transmit power range in capacity-assured mode. If the modulation scheme upshifts and
the preset transmit power is higher than the rated maximum transmit power allowed by the
new modulation scheme, the transmit power reduces. This is why the ODU/RFU's transmit
power varies as the modulation scheme changes.
Q: When the AM function is disabled and the modulation scheme is upshifted or
downshifted (for example, between QPSK and 256QAM), the working time count of a
medium-efficiency modulation scheme (for example, 64QAM) may be recorded. Why?
A: When the AM function is disabled, the modulation scheme must be changed in sequence.
For example, to change the modulation scheme from QPSK to 256QAM, an NE adjusts the
modulation scheme step by step in the following order: QPSK->16QAM->32QAM-
>64QAM->128QAM->256QAM. A recording may be taken at one of the step intervals.
3.8 PLA/EPLA/EPLA+
Physical link aggregation (PLA) aggregates all Ethernet transmission paths in several
Integrated IP microwave links into a logical Ethernet link for higher Ethernet bandwidth and
Ethernet transmission reliability. Enhanced Physical Link Aggregation (EPLA) is enhanced
PLA. Enhanced Physical Link Aggregation Plus (EPLA+) is super PLA.
3.8.1 Introduction
This section defines PLA/EPLA/EPLA+/Super EPLA and describes the purpose of this
feature.

Definition
As shown in Figure 3-65, PLA allows all Ethernet transmission paths in several Integrated IP
microwave links connected to the same equipment to be aggregated as a PLA. For MAC
users, a PLA works as a single link. PLA is also called L1 LAG.
NOTE
Native TDM services on the Integrated IP microwave links are irrelevant to the PLA.
Different from air-interface LAG, PLA dynamically allocates Ethernet traffic based on the
real-time Ethernet bandwidth over each member radio link to achieve almost the same
Ethernet bandwidth utilization on member radio links. Except being free from the Ethernet
frame type and packet length, the load sharing mechanism used by PLA even does not require
the same Ethernet bandwidth on radio links involved. Moreover, this load sharing mechanism
is also able to ensure almost the same Ethernet bandwidth utilization on member links when
the Ethernet bandwidth changes differently on each member link.
Air-interface LAG, also called L2 LAG, aggregates multiple integrated radio links based on
IEEE 802.3ad. To implement load sharing, Ethernet traffic is allocated using the hash
algorithm based on packet headers including IP addresses, MAC addresses, or MPLS labels.
For details about air-interface LAG, see LAG.
PLA is available in four modes, conventional mode, enhanced mode, super mode, and Super
Dual Band mode.
l Conventional PLA has IF boards allocate traffic. Only two radio links share load.
Generally, conventional PLA is called PLA.
l Enhanced PLA has packet switching units allocate traffic. A maximum of four radio
links share load. Enhanced PLA is called EPLA.
l The PLA in super mode has the packet switching unit to distribute traffic to the dual-
channel IF board. Then, the dual-channel IF board distributes traffic to the IF ports. This
mode supports the load sharing of a maximum of eight microwave links. Therefore, this
super mode is called EPLA+.
l The PLA in Super Dual Band mode binds links at common bands and E-Band links to
implement long-distance large-bandwidth transmission. The EM6D board is used to
distribute traffic to the two types of links according to service priorities. The PLA in
Super Dual Band Mode is called Super EPLA.
NOTE
For more details about Super EPLA, see the Super Dual Band User Manual.
Figure 3-65 PLA/EPLA/EPLA+

Radio link 1
Native TDM Channel
Ethernet
Channel
Physical
Link
Aggregation
Ethernet
Channel
Native TDM Channel
Radio link 2

Purpose
PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ helps to increase Ethernet service bandwidth and reliability in Integrated
IP microwave mode when air-interface LAG is inapplicable (for example, when member
radio links provide different Ethernet bandwidths or the load sharing algorithm used by air-
interface LAG cannot implement load balancing between member radio links).

This section describes the basic concepts associated with the physical link aggregation (PLA)/
Enhanced Physical Link Aggregation(EPLA) function.
3.8.2.1 Port Types

PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ member ports are classified into main ports and slave ports.
Main Port
A main port represents its PLA group. A main port has the following characteristics:
l A main port represents a PLA group to participate in service configuration.

l A PLA group has only one main port.
l The main port of a PLA group does not change according to the port status.
l After a PLA group is deleted, its services are still carried by the main port.
Slave Port
In a PLA group, the ports other than the main port are slave ports. A slave port has the
following characteristics:
l A slave port cannot participate in service configuration.

l The slave port of a PLA group does not change according to the port status.
NOTE
l A PLA group has only one slave port.

l An EPLA group has a maximum of three slave ports.
l A EPLA+ group has a maximum of seven slave ports.
3.8.2.2 Switching Conditions

PLA switching and EPLA/EPLA+ switching have different trigger conditions.
Trigger Conditions for PLA Switching

Link fault switching causes a decrease in the bandwidth of a PLA group but does not interrupt
Ethernet services. Equipment fault switching causes switching between IF boards and
therefore transiently interrupts Ethernet services. Table 3-25 provides the trigger conditions
for the two types of PLA switching.

Table 3-25 Trigger conditions for PLA switching
Switching Type Trigger Condition
Link fault switching l MW_LOF

l R_LOF
l R_LOC
l MW_RDI
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l AES_MAC_ERR
Equipment fault switching l HARD_BAD (on the current working IF

board)
l Board removal/Cold board reset (on the
current working IF board)
NOTE
If the IF board on the faulty equipment is not the working IF board or a non-working IF board is reset
(cold), link fault switching occurs, instead of equipment fault switching.
For dual-channel IF board, only link-level protection is available. Equipment-level protection is
unavailable.
Trigger Conditions for EPLA/EPLA+ Switching

Unlike PLA switching, EPLA/EPLA+ switching is not classified into link fault switching and
equipment fault switching. Table 3-26 provides the trigger conditions for EPLA/EPLA+
switching.
Table 3-26 Trigger conditions for EPLA/EPLA+ switching
Switching Type Trigger Condition
EPLA/EPLA+ switching l MW_LOF

l R_LOF
l R_LOC
l MW_RDI
l MW_BER_EXC
l MW_BER_SD
l HARD_BAD
l AES_MAC_ERR
l Board removal/Cold board reset
l EPLA: BUS_ERR (0X08)


For PLA switching, the time for link fault switching is different from that for equipment fault
switching. Unlike PLA switching, EPLA switching is not classified into link fault switching
and equipment fault switching.
l During a link fault switchover lasting not longer than 50 ms, PLA-protected Ethernet
services are not interrupted.
l During an equipment fault switchover lasting shorter than 500 ms, PLA-protected
Ethernet services are transiently interrupted.
l During an EPLA switchover lasting shorter than 500 ms (low to 50 ms when the ISU2/
ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 is used), EPLA protected Ethernet services are transiently interrupted.
l During an EPLA+ switchover lasting shorter than 500 ms (low to 50 ms in typical
scenarios), EPLA+ protected Ethernet services are transiently interrupted.
l Native TDM services are not affected during PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ switching or traffic
adjustments, because PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ applies only to Ethernet services.
3.8.3 Principles
PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ not only reallocates service traffic upon Ethernet bandwidth adjustments,
but also performs service protection switching upon a link or equipment failure.
3.8.3.1 PLA
The mechanism of PLA switching triggered by link faults and that triggered by equipment
faults are different.
NOTE
If an ISV3 board is used, the shaping function of the packet switching unit is implemented on the ISV3
board.
In the following, two single-channel IF boards are used as an example to illustrate the switching
principle.
Before PLA Switching

l In the transmit direction:
a. As shown in Figure 3-66, the packet switching unit performs shaping for Ethernet
traffic based on the real-time Ethernet bandwidth provided by the PLA group, and
transmits the Ethernet traffic to the IF board where the main port is located through
the backplane bus.
b. The PLA module on board A runs the traffic balancing algorithm and schedules
Ethernet traffic to boards A and B based on the real-time bandwidth provided by
board A and that provided by board B.
c. The MUX unit combines the Ethernet traffic on the radio link where the main port
is located (referred to as the main radio link), the Native TDM traffic, and
overheads on the main radio link as microwave frames. The modem unit processes
(such as modulates) the microwave frames and sends the frames to the ODU.
d. The PLA module on board A transmits the Ethernet traffic on the radio link where
the slave port is located (referred to as the slave radio link) to the board B through
the HSM bus. The MUX unit on board B combines the Ethernet traffic on the slave
radio link, the Native TDM traffic, and overheads on the slave radio link as

microwave frames. The modem unit processes (such as modulates) the microwave
frames and sends the frames to the ODU.
e. board B transmits information such as its air-interface working mode and Ethernet
service bandwidth to board A. board A dynamically adjusts traffic on the main and
slave radio links based on the real-time bandwidth provided by the main and slave
radio links each. In addition, board A calculates the total Ethernet bandwidth
provided by the PLA group and transmits the result to the packet switching unit. In
this manner, the PLA module on board A is capable of dynamically and evenly
scheduling traffic between boards A and B.
Figure 3-66 PLA principles (before PLA switching)

P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
Packet A A' Packet

HSM bus HSM bus
switching switching
unit unit
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
B B'
A/A': IF unit providing the main port Ethernet service
B/B': IF unit providing the slave port
l In the receive direction:

a. The MUX unit on the main IF board A' extracts the Ethernet traffic and transmits
the traffic to the PLA module.
b. The PLA module on board A' receives the Ethernet traffic that is separated by the
MUX unit on the slave IF board B', through the HSM bus.
c. The PLA module on board A' align and decapsulates frames contained in the
Ethernet traffic separated from boards A' and B', and transmits the traffic to the
packet switching unit through the backplane bus.
NOTE
The receive buffer in the PLA module enables Ethernet packets to be received and transmitted in the
same time sequence.
Ethernet Bandwidth Adjustment

As shown in Figure 3-67, if the Ethernet bandwidth provided by the slave radio link
decreases, board A transmits OAM packets to the packet switching unit, notifying the current
traffic volume. Based on the received traffic volume, the packet switching unit performs
shaping for the Ethernet traffic to ensure that appropriate Ethernet traffic volume is
transmitted over board A. At the same time, the PLA module on board A allocates less
Ethernet traffic to the slave radio link.

Figure 3-67 Ethernet bandwidth adjustment

P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
Packet A A' Packet

HSM bus HSM bus
switching switching
unit unit
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
B B'
After link protection switching

After a link in a PLA group fails, the PLA module responsible for allocating and scheduling
traffic stops transmitting traffic to the failed link but transmits traffic only to the other
functional link. In this case, only one link is available and therefore the PLA group provides
lower Ethernet bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 3-68, if the main radio link fails, the PLA module on board A stops
transmitting Ethernet traffic to the main radio link but transmits Ethernet traffic only to the
slave radio link.
After the main radio link recovers, the PLA module on board A automatically enables
Ethernet traffic to be transmitted on both the main and slave links.
Figure 3-68 After link protection switching principles(after switching)

P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
Packet A A' Packet

HSM bus HSM bus
switching switching
unit unit
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
B B'
After NE-level protection switching

Equipment faults (including cold resets) are classified into main IF board faults and slave IF
board faults.
l Main IF board faults:
As shown in Figure 3-69, if board A is faulty, the packet switching unit switches
Ethernet traffic from board A to board B; the PLA module on board B is then responsible
for scheduling the traffic.

As shown in Figure 3-70, after the fault on board A is rectified, Ethernet traffic will not
be switched back from board B to board A. Instead, the PLA module on board B runs the
traffic balancing algorithm and schedules traffic to boards A and B based on their real-
time Ethernet bandwidth.
l Slave IF board faults:
If board B is faulty, the LPA switching principles are the same as those used when the
slave link fails.
Figure 3-69 NE-level protection switching principles (after switching)
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
Packet Packet
switching A A' switching
HSM bus HSM bus
unit unit
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
B B'
Figure 3-70 NE-level protection switching principles (after the fault is rectified)
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
Packet Packet
switching A A' switching
HSM bus HSM bus
unit unit
P M M P
L U U L
A X X A
B B'
3.8.3.2 EPLA
The switching mechanism for EPLA switching due to a link failure is the same as that for
EPLA switching due to an equipment failure. Link protection is taken as an example.
In the following, two single-channel IF boards are used as an example to illustrate the
switching principle.
Before Switching
a. As shown in Figure 3-71, the packet switching unit runs the EPLA algorithm, and
allocates Ethernet traffic to the two radio links.

b. The MUX module on the IF board providing the main port (IF board A, for short)
combines Ethernet services, Native TDM services, and overheads into microwave
frames. The modem module modulates the microwave frames and sends them to the
main ODU. The main ODU sends the microwave frames to the master radio link.
c. The MUX module on the IF board providing the slave port (IF board B, for short)
combines Ethernet services, Native TDM services, and overheads into microwave
frames. The modem module modulates the microwave frames and sends them to the
standby ODU. The standby ODU sends the microwave frames to the slave radio
link.
Figure 3-71 EPLA principles (before switching)

M M
U U
X X
Packet A A' Packet

switching switching
unit unit
M M
U U
X X
B B'
A/A': main port Ethernet service
B/B': slave port

a. IF board A' and IF board B' transmit the received Ethernet services to the packet
switching unit.
b. The packet switching unit recovers one channel of Ethernet services.

As shown in Figure 3-72, the packet switching unit adjusts Ethernet traffic allocated to the
master and slave radio links based on the Ethernet bandwidths reported by the IF boards.

M M
U U
X X
Packet A A' Packet

switching switching
unit unit
M M
U U
X X
B B'
B/B': slave port

After Link Fault Switching

When a link in an EPLA group fails, the packet switching unit does not transmit Ethernet
services to the failed link but only to the failure-free link. In this case, the EPLA group
provides lower Ethernet bandwidth because only the failure-free link is transmitting services.
As shown in Figure 3-73, when the master radio link fails, the packet switching unit does not
transmit Ethernet services to the master link but only to the slave link.
After the master radio link recovers, the packet switching unit transmits Ethernet services to
the master and slave radio links.
Figure 3-73 Link fault switching principles (after switching)

M M
U U
X X
Packet A A' Packet

switching switching
unit unit
M M
U U
X X
B B'
B/B': slave port
3.8.3.3 EPLA+
EPLA+ is the combination of PLA and EPLA.
Before Switching
NOTE
This section describes EPLA+ switching triggered by a link fault. In this illustrative example, the 4+0 EPLA+
protection group consists of two dual-port IF boards.
a. As shown in Figure 3-74, the packet switching unit allocates traffic to the two
EPLA+ units based on the link bandwidth of each IF board. Each EPLA+ unit
allocates traffic to two MUX units based on the bandwidth of each link.
b. The MUX unit of each link combines Ethernet service signals, native TDM service
signals, and overheads into microwave frames. The modem units modulate the
microwave frames and send them to the ODUs. The ODUs send the microwave
frames to microwave links.

Figure 3-74 EPLA+ principles (before switching)

M M
E U U E
P X X P
L L
A A
M M
+ +
U U
X X
Packet
Packet A A' switching
switching unit
unit
M
E U M
P X U E
L X P
A L
M
+ A
U M
+
X U
X
B B'
B/B': slave port

a. The MUX unit of each link extracts Ethernet service signals from received
microwave frames and sends the Ethernet service signals to the EPLA+ unit.
b. The EPLA+ unit on each IF board combines the two channels of Ethernet service
signals received from the two MUX units into one channel and sends it to the
packet switching unit.
c. The packet switching unit combines the two channels of Ethernet service signals
received from the two IF boards into one channel.

As shown in Figure 3-75, each MUX unit reports the Ethernet bandwidth of each link to the
EPLA+ unit. Then, the EPLA+ unit reports the Ethernet bandwidth of the entire IF board to
the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit adjusts Ethernet traffic to be allocated to
each IF board based on the Ethernet bandwidth that each IF board reports. The EPLA+ unit
adjusts Ethernet traffic to be allocated to each link based on the Ethernet bandwidth of each
link.


M M
E U U E
P X X P
L L
A A
M M
+ +
U U
X X
Packet
switching unit
unit
M
E U M
P X U E
L X P
A L
M
+ A
U M
+
X U
X
B B'
B/B': slave port
After Switching
When a link on an IF board is faulty, the EPLA+ unit of the IF board considers the Ethernet
bandwidth of the other link as the Ethernet bandwidth of the entire board and reports the
Ethernet bandwidth to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit adjusts Ethernet
traffic to be allocated to each IF board and then the EPLA+ units allocate Ethernet traffic to
the normal links on the IF boards.
As shown in Figure 3-76, the normal links on the IF boards share the Ethernet traffic of the
faulty link.
When the faulty link is recovered, Ethernet traffic is allocated to the link again.
Figure 3-76 EPLA+ principles (after switching)

M M
E U U E
P X X P
L L
A A
M M
+ +
U U
X X
Packet
switching unit
unit
M
E U M
P X U E
L X P
A L
M
+ A
U M
+
X U
X
B B'
B/B': slave port

This section describes the specifications of PLA/EPLA/EPLA+.
Specifications of PLA
Table 3-27 lists the specifications of PLA.
Table 3-27 Specifications of PLA
Item Specification
Maximum number of supported PLA 5
Type of supported ports in a PLA Integrated IP microwave ports
Number of IF ports in a PLA 2
Supported IF service types Native E1+Ethernet

Native STM-1+Ethernet
PLA bandwidth adjustment depending on Supported

the Ethernet bandwidth
Switching time Link fault switching ≤ 50 ms
Equipment fault < 500 ms

switching
Specifications of EPLA
Table 3-28 provides the specifications of EPLA.
Table 3-28 Specifications of EPLA
Item Specification
Maximum number of 4
supported EPLA
Type of supported ports Integrated IP microwave ports

in an EPLA
Number of sIF ports in 4

an EPLA
Supported IF service Native E1+Ethernet

types Native STM-1+Ethernet
EPLA group bandwidth Supported

adjustment depending
on the Ethernet
bandwidth

Item Specification
Switching time < 500 ms (even as short as 50 ms in typical scenarios)
Specifications of EPLA+
Table 3-29 provides the specifications of EPLA.
Table 3-29 Specifications of EPLA+
Item Specification
Maximum number of 4
supported EPLA+
Type of supported ports Integrated IP microwave ports

in an EPLA+
Number of sIF ports in 8

an EPLA+ NOTE
An EPLA+ group contains a maximum of four IF boards.
Supported IF service Native E1+Ethernet

types Native STM-1+Ethernet
EPLA+ group Supported

bandwidth adjustment
depending on the
Ethernet bandwidth
Switching time < 500 ms (even as short as 50 ms in typical scenarios)
3.8.5 Availability
This section lists the hardware requirements that the product must meet in order to run PLA/
EPLA/EPLA+.
Feature Name System Control Board Board Type (Port Type)
PLA CSHO ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ISM6 (IF

port)
EPLA CSHO IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/

ISM6 (IF port)
EPLA+ CSHO ISV3/ISM6 (IF port)


This section provides a history of PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ updates.
Feature Updates
Version Description
V100R005C01 PLA/EPLA is first available in this version.
V100R007C10 EPLA+ is first available in this version.
V100R008C10 Super EPLA is first available in this version. For details

about this feature, see Super Dual Band User Manual.
PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ supports RMON measurement by port.

This section describes the dependencies and limitations of PLA/EPLA/EPLA+.
Self-limitations

Item Self-limitation of Self-limitation of Self-limitation of
PLA EPLA EPLA+
Maximum number 2 4 8
of members NOTE
An EPLA+ group
contains a maximum
of four dual-channel
IF boards.
Slots The IF boards (two None None

single-channel IF
boards) that provide
the master and slave
ports for a PLA
group must be
installed in paired
slots.


PLA EPLA EPLA+
Type of IF board ISU2/ISX2/ISV3/ IFU2/ISU2/ISX2/ ISV3/ISM6

ISM6 ISV3/ISM6 NOTE
NOTE NOTE l EPLA+ does not
The ISM6 type only The two IF ports on support the IS2
supports inter-board an ISM6 board must mode.
PLA that consists of be in the same EPLA
l An EPLA+ group
two IF ports. group.
requires at least
one ISM6 board.
l The two IF ports
of an ISM6 board
must belong to
the same EPLA
group.
l IF board
members in
EPLA+ groups
must be of the
same type at both
ends of a
microwave link.
IF board mix The members in a ISV3/ISM6 boards Only ISV3 and

PLA group must be and ISU2/ISX2 ISM6 boards
IF boards of the boards working in working in IS3
same type, except IS2 mode can be mode can be mixed.
that an ISV3 board mixed or ISV3 and
working in IS2 ISM6 boards
mode and an ISX2/ working in IS3
ISU2 board can mode can be mixed.
form a PLA group.
Channel spacing The members in a Radio links can The combinations

PLA group must use constitute an EPLA include:
the same channel group when using a l 7 MHz/14 MHz
spacing. combination of the
following different l 14 MHz/28 MHz
channel spacings: l 28 MHz/40 MHz
l 7 MHz and 14 l 28 MHz/56 MHz
MHz l 40 MHz/56 MHz
l 14 MHz and 28
MHz
l 28 MHz and 40
MHz
l 28 MHz and 56
MHz
l 40 MHz and 56
MHz


PLA EPLA EPLA+
Recommended Not higher than 20:1 Not higher than 10:1 Not higher than 5:1
proportion of the
maximum member
Ethernet bandwidth
to the minimum
member Ethernet
bandwidth
IF service type The members in a The members in an The members in an

PLA group must EPLA group must EPLA group must
transmit the same transmit the same transmit the same
type of IF services. type of IF services. type of IF services.
Configuration To create a PLA To create an EPLA l To create an

group, the slave port group, the slave EPLA+ group,
must be idle and ports must be idle the slave ports
Port Mode should and Port Mode must be idle and
be set to Layer 2. should be set to Port Mode
During the creation Layer 2. should be set to
or deletion of a PLA Layer 2.
group on ISU2 or
ISX2 boards, the
ISU2 or ISX2
boards are cold
reset.
Interconnection Interconnection with PLA, EPLA, and EPLA+ is not supported.


PLA EPLA EPLA+
Bandwidth limit The bandwidth of a l If an EPLA The sum of

PLA group must not group is maximum Ethernet
be greater than the configured on an bandwidths of two
backplane ISM6 board, the EPLA+ members on
bandwidth of the IF total throughput an ISM6 board must
board. of the two not be greater than 1
microwave ports Gbit/s.
can reach 80% of
the backplane
bandwidth at
most.
l If an EPLA
group is
configured on an
ISM6 board in
slot 4 or 6, the
backplane
bandwidth of the
board is 1 Gbit/s.
If an EPLA
group is
configured on an
ISM6 board in
another slot, the
backplane
bandwidth of the
board is 2.5
Gbit/s.
Dependencies and Limitations Between PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ and Other Features
Table 3-31 Dependencies and limitations between PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ and other features
Feature Description
Inband DCN The protocol type of the inband DCN must be the same for
all members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group.
1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection l The main ports in 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection groups
(HSB is short for hot are allowed to form an EPLA group, but a 1+1 IF
standby, FD for frequency protection group must be created prior to the EPLA/
diversity, and SD for space EPLA+ group. In this case, a main port is calculated as
diversity.) two EPLA/EPLA+ members.
l The main ports in two 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection
groups are not allowed to form a PLA group.

Feature Description
Cross polarization l Two links in an XPIC group can be configured in a

interference cancellation PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group. If ISX2/ISV3 boards consist
(XPIC) of the PLA, they must be in two paired slots.
l If a link in an XPIC group and another link not in the
XPIC group form a PLA group, the other link in the
XPIC group cannot be configured with PLA.
Ethernet frame header EPLA/EPLA+ does not support Ethernet frame header
compression compression.
The master and slave ports in a PLA group must use the
same Ethernet frame header compression mode.
The ISU2 or ISX2 boards configured with PLA do not
support Layer 3 Ethernet frame header compression.
Ethernet protection like When PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ coexists with Ethernet protection

ERPS/LPT (ERPS is short like ERPS or LPT, Ethernet protection switching can be
for Ethernet ring protection triggered when a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group fails or when
switching, and LPT for link- some members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group fail. To
state pass through.) trigger Ethernet protection switching by some failed
members, set Minimum Number of Activated Member
Links.
RMON PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ supports RMON measurement by port

and group.
Enhanced Ethernet frame EPLA or EPLA+ does not support enhanced Ethernet frame
compression compression.
Air-interface encryption by An AES_MAC_ERR alarm will trigger PLA/EPLA/EPLA+

AES switching.
Features That Conflict with PLA/EPLA

l N+1 protection
l LAG

This section provides the guidelines to be followed when you plan physical link aggregation
(PLA/EPLA/EPLA+).
l EPLA is preferred when supported at both ends of a microwave link.
l The two IF boards in a PLA group must be installed in paired slots. On the OptiX RTN
950A, install the two IF boards in a PLA group in slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 5, or slots 4
and 6. It is recommended that the IF board in the smaller numbered slot be the active
board. The two IF boards in an EPLA group can be installed in any slots.
l PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ parameter settings must be the same at both receive and transmit
ends.

l When PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ coexists with Ethernet protection like ERPS or LPT, Ethernet
protection switching can be triggered when some members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+
group are faulty. To trigger Ethernet protection switching by some failed members, set
Minimum Number of Activated Member Links based on the following formula:
Minimum number of activated member links = Maximum number of remaining activated
member links upon the triggering of protection switching + 1
l The limitation on channel spacing, paired slots, and IF service types is provided in 3.8.7
Feature Dependencies and Limitations.
l It is recommended that EPLA+ be used only when the number of members in an EPLA
group is greater than four (maximum value).

Relevant alarms are reported if PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ parameter settings are different at the
receive and transmit ends.
Relevant Alarms
l PLA_CFG_MISMATCH
Indicates that the PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ parameter setting or header compression mode
used at the receive end of the main/slave link in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group is different
from that used at the transmit end.
l PLA_MEMBER_DOWN
Indicates that some members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group are unactivated. This alarm
is reported when the member links in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group or the IF hardware is
faulty.
l PLA_MEMBER_DOWN_EXT
The PLA_MEMBER_DOWN_EXT alarm is reported when a member link of a Super
EPLA group is faulty.
l PLA_DOWN
Indicates that a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group is unavailable. This alarm is reported when
the number of activated members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group is 0 or smaller than the
minimum number of activated member links.

None
3.8.10 FAQs
This section answers the questions that are frequently asked when PLA/EPLA is used.
Q: Why must single-IF boards in a PLA group be configured in two paired slots?
A: The PLA module needs to transmit Ethernet traffic and information such as the air-
interface working mode and real-time Ethernet bandwidth between the main and slave IF
boards, through the HSM bus that is available only between the two paired slots.
Q: Can member links in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group carry different types of IF

services?

A: No. The IF services transmitted by the members in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ must be of the

same type.
Q: What are purposes of the Minimum Active Links parameter?
A: You can set Minimum Active Links to (the maximum number of remaining activated
member links upon the triggering of protection switching + 1) to help trigger ERPS switching
once one member link in a PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ group fails.

RFU User Manual 4 Safety Precautions
4 Safety Precautions
About This Chapter
This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating,
and maintaining Huawei devices
4.1 Safety Precautions

and maintaining Huawei devices.
4.2 Notices for High-Risk Operations
This topic provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment
damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of
microwave equipment.

4.1 Safety Precautions

and maintaining Huawei devices.
4.1.1 General Safety Precautions

This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
All Safety Precautions

To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all
the safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.
Local Laws and Regulations

When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.
Basic Installation Requirements

The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a
device.
l Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to
troubleshoot and maintain the device.
l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or
change the device or parts of the device (including software).
l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause
safety problems to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.
l Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.
l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.
l The device must be connected to the PGND permanently. Before operating the device,
check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the device is properly
grounded.

Human Safety
l When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.
l When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
NOTE
The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.
l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be
hurt by laser beams.
l Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD
wrist strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and
watches, to prevent electric shock and burn.
l In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning
building again in any situation.
Device Safety
l Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such
as on a wall or in a rack.
l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.
l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.
l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
4.1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols

Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the
equipment.
Table 4-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950A and their meanings.
Table 4-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 950A
Symbol Indication
This symbol is for ESD protection.

A notice with this symbol indicates that you should wear
an ES wrist strap or glove when you touch a board.
Otherwise, you may cause damage to the board.

Symbol Indication
This symbol is for the laser class.

CLASS 1
LASER A notice with this symbol indicates the class of the laser.
PRODUCT Avoid direct exposure to the laser beams. Otherwise, it
may damage you eyes or skin.
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY

WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
A notice with this symbol indicates where the subrack is

grounded.
A notice with this symbol indicates that the air filter

ATTENTION 警告 should be cleaned periodically.
CLEAN PERIODICALLY定期清洗
严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片 This symbol is for fan safety.

DON'T TOUCH THE
FAN LEAVES BEFORE A notice with this symbol indicates that the fan leaves
THEY SLOW DOWN !
should not be touched when the fan is rotating.
4.1.3 Electrical Safety

This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage
current, power cables, fuses, and ESD.
High Voltage
DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock,
or both.
Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy
weather conditions.
High Leakage Current
CAUTION
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the
device cannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the
device.
Power Cables
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core
of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire
or eye injury.
l Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.
l Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.
Device with Power On
DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.
DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments
in accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.
NOTICE
To avoid short-circuits when using a tool (such as a screwdriver), do not place the tool on the
ventilation plate of the subrack.
NOTICE
Prevent any screws from dropping into the subrack or chassis to avoid short-circuits.
Fuse
CAUTION
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications
to ensure safe operation of the device.
Electrostatic Discharge
NOTICE
The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive
components on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).
l The human body can generate static electromagnetic fields in the following situations:
physical movement, clothing friction, friction between shoes and the ground, plastics in
the hand. Such static electromagnetic effects can remain for an appreciable time.
l Before operating a device, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strap that is
properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitive
components from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.
Figure 4-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

Figure 4-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
4.1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas

This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.
4.1.5 Storage Batteries

This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be
familiar with the method of connecting a storage battery.
l Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any
short-circuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.
l If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-
circuit, which leads to human injuries.

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage
battery:
l Use special insulation tools.
l Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.
l Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the
overflowing electrolyte.
l When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.
l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short-Circuit
DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.
Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the
working battery before performing other operations.
Hazardous Gas
NOTICE
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and
fireproofing measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.
Battery Temperature
NOTICE
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60°C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

Battery Leakage
NOTICE
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb
the leaking electrolyte:
l Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

l Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended
by the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.
4.1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
4.1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers

The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.
DANGER
When installing or maintaining an optical interface board or optical fibers, avoid direct eye
exposure to the laser beams launched from the optical interface board or fiber connectors. The
laser beam can cause damage to your eyes.
Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces
NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned
before the fiber is led into the equipment through the ODF for being inserted into an optical
interface on the equipment.

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:
l Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can
also be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)
l Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent
l Special magnifier for fiber connectors
For cleaning steps, see Task Collection "Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Adapters" in the
OptiX RTN 950A Radio Transmission System Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Replacing Optical Fibers

When replacing an optical fiber, cover the fiber connector of the unused optical fiber with a
protective cap.
Connecting Optical Fibers

l Use an attenuator if the optical power is excessively high. A high received optical power
damages the optical interface.
l Directly connect an attenuator to a slanting optical interface. Install the attenuator on the
IN port instead of the OUT port.
l Do not directly connect an attenuator to the level optical interface. Use the optical
distribution frame (ODF) to connect an attenuator to a level optical interface.
Figure 4-2 shows a slanting optical interface, and Figure 4-3 shows a level optical interface.
Figure 4-2 Slanting optical interface
Slanting optical
interface

Figure 4-3 Level optical interface
Level optical
interface
4.1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure

This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the
transmit directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.
NOTICE
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.
4.1.6.3 Forbidden Areas

The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified
range, the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at
least 10 meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.
l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each
forbidden area.
4.1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

CAUTION
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet
directly without eye protection.
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The
laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it
has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes,
the eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without
eye protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may
occur, however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used
to view an un-terminated optical fiber.
Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers

To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.
l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.
l Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical
source is switched off.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.
Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling

Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:
l Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.
l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.
4.1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.
CAUTION
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.

When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.
4.1.7 Working at Heights

This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
CAUTION
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:

l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.
l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from
falling down.
l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.
l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.
4.1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects

This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow
when installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
CAUTION
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object
or wall with good weight-bearing capacity.
l Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.
l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during
the lifting, as shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Hoisting heavy objects
4.1.7.2 Using Ladders

This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.
Checking Ladders
l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the
ladder is in good condition, you can use the ladder.
l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder.
Avoid overweighing the ladder.
Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the
ladder with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 4-5. When using a ladder, to
prevent the ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take
protection measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Figure 4-5 Slanting a ladder
Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.
l Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.
l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

4.1.8 Mechanical Safety

This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating
fans, and carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
CAUTION
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.
l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the
drilling, clean up the metallic scraps.
Sharp Objects
CAUTION
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.
Fans
l When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.
l When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the
boards are damaged.
Carrying Heavy Objects

Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being
hurt.

CAUTION
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to
prevent the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects
on the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down,
which may hurt you.
l Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs
and move stably to avoid being strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan
modules, and boards.
4.1.9 Other Precautions

This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal
cables, and routing cables.
Removing and Inserting a Board
NOTICE
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently
to avoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l Slide the board along the guide rails.

l Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.
l When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.
Binding Signal Cables
NOTICE
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.
Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic
skin of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:

l When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0°C.
l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0°C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.
l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform
any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.
High Temperature
CAUTION
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked
the flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an
environment, you must wear the protection gloves.
IF Cables
CAUTION
Before installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.
4.2 Notices for High-Risk Operations

This topic provides notices for the operations that may cause bodily injury or equipment
damage if they are not performed properly during the commissioning and maintenance of
microwave equipment.
4.2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch

The ODU-PWR switch on the IF board is a toggle lever switch which must be turned on and
off according to the following instructions to avoid damaging the IF board.
Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch

The toggle lever switch is located on the IF board and controls the power that is fed to the
ODU, as shown in Figure 4-7.
NOTE
ISM6 boards do not have any toggle lever switches.

Figure 4-7 Toggle lever switch
Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch

1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.
2. Turn it to the left.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.
Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch

1. Gently pull on the toggle lever switch out.
2. Turn it to the right.

3. Release the toggle lever switch.
4.2.2 Operation Guide for the IF Jumper

Before installing or removing IF jumpers, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent
personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.
Precaution
NOTICE
l For an IF board with a power switch, do not disconnect/connect the IF jumper with power
on.
l For an IF board (ISM6) without a power switch, do not disconnect/connect the IF jumper
with no load; that is, ensure that the IF jumper is already connected to its IF cable and
ODU.
Procedure
Step 1 For an IF board with a power switch:
1. Follow instructions in 4.2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off
the ODU.

1 2
DANGER
Ensure that the ODU is completely powered off before removing or installing the IF
jumper.
2. Remove or install the IF jumper.

Step 2 For an IF board (ISM6) without a power switch:
1. Ensure that the IF jumper is already connected to its IF cable and ODU.
2. Disconnect/Connect the IF jumper.
----End
4.2.3 Operation Guide for the IF Cables

Before installing or removing IF cables, shut down the ODU power supply to prevent
personal injuries and damaged to the IF boards or ODU.

Precautions
NOTICE
on.
ODU.
Procedure
1. Follow instructions in 4.2.1 Operation Guide for the Toggle Lever Switch to power off
the ODU.
1 2
DANGER
cable.
2. Install or remove the IF cables.


2. Connect/Disconnect the IF cable.
----End
4.2.4 Operation Guide for the IF Board

Before removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch to avoid bodily
injury or damage to the IF board and ODU.
Precautions
NOTICE
on.
ODU.
Procedure
1. Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF board. For details, see 4.2.1 Operation Guide
for the Toggle Lever Switch.
1 2 3

DANGER
board.
2. Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.

3. Remove or install the IF board.
2. Disconnect the IF jumper/IF cable.
3. Disconnect/Connect the IF board.
----End

RFU User Manual 5 Installation
5 Installation
For an RTN 950A providing multiple-channel communication, follow instructions in the RTN
950A V100R008 Quick Installation Guide (Split LH, Outdoor Components) to install its
indoor components and follow instructions in the Quick Installation Guide (Split LH, Outdoor
Components) to install its outdoor components.

RFU User Manual 6 Commissioning
6 Commissioning
About This Chapter
This chapter describes special commissioning tasks for a multi-channel microwave system
6.1 Commissioning Process

Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
6.2 RFU Commissioning Tasks
This chapter describes RFU commissioning tasks.

6.1 Commissioning Process

Based on the objects to be commissioned, the process can be divided into two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
6.1.1 Site Commissioning Process

Site commissioning refers to commissioning that is performed on a hop and sites at both ends
of a radio link. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites
work properly, and is also performed in preparation of system commissioning.
Context
You can use the following methods to configure site commissioning data for the OptiX RTN
950A on site:
l Web LCT
l USB flash drive
Site Commissioning Flowchart (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using

the Web LCT)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on
site when they are:
l Familiar with how to configure radio link data on the OptiX RTN 950A or ready with the
commissioning data scripts.
l Aware of the radio link data plan for the site.
l Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.
Figure 6-1 shows the site commissioning flowchart.

Figure 6-1 Commissioning flowchart

Running commissioning data scripts on the Web LCT Manually configuring commissioning data
Start Start
Power on the equipment Power on the equipment
Connect the Web LCT Connect the Web LCT

to the IDU to the IDU
Run commissioning
data scripts on the Web Manually configure
Test connectivity of Test connectivity of commissioning data
LCT
E1 cables E1 cables
Test connectivity of Check alarms Test connectivity of Check alarms

Ethernet cables Ethernet cables
Test connectivity of Test connectivity of

Test connectivity of cables Test connectivity of cables
fibers fibers
Align single-polarized Align single-polarized

Align antennas Align antennas
antennas antennas
Align dual-polarized Checking the RF Align dual-polarized Checking the RF

antennas installation and antennas installation and
commissioning quality commissioning quality
Perform an SD Perform an SD
combination hold-off combination hold-off
compensation test. compensation test.
Query the status and Query the status and

receive power of a Required (parent item) receive power of a
radio link radio link
Required (subitem)
End Optional End
Table 6-1 Configuring site commissioning data by running commissioning data scripts on the
Web LCT
Commissioning Item Remarks
Powering On the Equipment Required
Logging In to the Web LCT (Through NMS Interface) Required
Downloading a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using Required

the Web LCT
Checking Alarms Required
Testing Connectivity of Testing Connectivity of E1 Required when E1 cables

Cables Cables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity of Required when Ethernet

Network Cables cables are used on the site
Checking Fiber Jumper Required when optical

Connection fibers are used on the site
6.2.1 Aligning the 6.2.1.2 Aligning Single- Required when microwave

Antennasa Polarized Antennas services are transmitted by
single-polarized antennas
6.2.1.3 Aligning Dual- Required when microwave

Polarized Antennas services are transmitted by
dual-polarized antennas
6.2.2 Checking the RF Installation and Commissioning Required

Quality
6.2.3 Performing an SD Combination Hold-Off Required when SD signal

Compensation Test reception and IF
combination are enabled
Checking the Radio Link Status and the Receive Power Required
Table 6-2 Manually configuring site commissioning data on the Web LCT
Logging In to the Web LCT (Through NMS Interface) Required
Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web Required

LCT
Checking Alarms Required
Testing Connectivity of Testing Connectivity of E1 Required when E1 cables

Cables Cables are used on the site
Testing Connectivity of Required when Ethernet

Network Cables cables are used on the site
Checking Fiber Jumper Required when optical

Connection fibers are used on the site
6.2.1 Aligning the 6.2.1.2 Aligning Single- Required when microwave

Antennasa Polarized Antennas services are transmitted by
single-polarized antennas
6.2.1.3 Aligning Dual- Required when microwave

Polarized Antennas services are transmitted by
dual-polarized antennas

6.2.2 Checking the RF Installation and Commissioning Required

Quality
6.2.3 Performing an SD Combination Hold-Off Required when SD signal

Compensation Test reception and IF
combination are enabled
Checking the Radio Link Status and the Receive Power Required
NOTE
a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on both ends of
the radio link.
Site Commissioning Flowchart (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using

a USB Flash Drive)
Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using a USB flash drive
on site when they are:
l Familiar with the radio link data plan for the target sites.
l Equipped with a USB flash drive that stores the NE commissioning data scripts.
l Equipped with a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.
Figure 6-2 shows the site commissioning flowchart.
Figure 6-2 Commissioning flowchart
Start
Powering on the equipment
Loading commissioning data

from a USB flash drive
Completing subsequent Using the Web LCT to complete

commissioning items subsequent commissioning Items
End
Required (parent item)
Required (subitem)

Table 6-3 Configuring site commissioning data by using a USB flash drive
Loading Commissioning Data from a USB Flash Drive Required
Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Required when subsequent

Commissioning Items actions need to be
performed on the Web LCT
6.1.2 System Commissioning Process

System commissioning refers to commissioning for the entire microwave transmission
network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and
protection functions are implemented over the microwave transmission network.
Context
Table 6-4 System commissioning process
Configuring Networkwide Service Data Required
Testing Connectivity Testing E1 Services Required when E1 service are available and
of E1 Services by Using a BER a BER tester is available on site
Tester
Testing E1 Services Required when E1 services are available

Using PRBS and no BER tester is available on site
Testing Connectivity Testing Ethernet Required when Ethernet services are

of Ethernet Services Services Configured available
on a Per-NE Basis
Testing Ethernet Required when Ethernet services are

Services Configured available
in an End-to-End
Manner
Testing ATM Services Required when ATM services are available
Testing AM Shifts Testing AM Shifts Required when the AM function is enabled

on IFU2 Boards and a BER tester is available on site
Testing AM Shifts Required when the AM function is enabled

on the ISU2/ISX2/ and no BER tester is available on site
ISV3

Testing Protection Testing IF 1+1 Required when the radio links are
Switching Protection Switching configured with the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
Testing N+1 Required when the N+1 protection is

Protection Switching configured
Testing SNCP Required when the SNCP is configured

Switching
Testing ERPS Required when ERPS is configured

Switching
Testing MPLS APS Required when MPLS APS protection is

Protection Switching configured
Testing Linear MSP Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP is

Switching configured
Checking the Clock Status Required
Testing the FM over a Radio Link Optional
Testing E1 Service Performance Required when E1 services are available
Testing Ethernet Testing E-Line Required when E-Line services are

Service Performance Service Performance available
(Based on OAM)
Testing the Long- Required when E-Line services are

term Packet Loss available
Ratio
Testing Ethernet Service Performance Required when E-LAN services are

(Based on RFC 2544) available
6.2 RFU Commissioning Tasks

This chapter describes RFU commissioning tasks.
6.2.1 Aligning the Antennas

Aligning the antennas is the most important activity in HOP commissioning. The alignment
has a direct effect on the performance of the radio links.
6.2.1.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes

Engineers performing an alignment on an antenna should be familiar with the related
knowledge of the main lobe and side lobes

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side Lobes

The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the
horizontal azimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the
vertical section. Figure 6-3 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure.
The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes
wherein the first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.
Figure 6-3 Main lobe and side lobes
Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe
Locating the Main Lobe

Antenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna align with the main
lobe of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the
opposite antenna reach the maximum value.
The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, between 0.6° and 3.7°. For
instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only
0.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very
small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall in the signal level.
Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal
peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal
peak.
Figure 6-4 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with
concentric rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

Figure 6-4 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna

180o
90o
0o
Center of the main lobe
Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-

180o 10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
90o First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe
Trough between the first side lobe

and the second side lobe, 30 dB
0o or more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
a Horizontal section of signals are very weak
b Head-on view
the antenna
Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevation (or azimuth). Figure 6-5 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of the antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the
ODU).
Figure 6-5 Three tracking paths

Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations Signal levels for each path
6 7
C C'
C 6 7 C' 5
4
4 5
B B'
B B'
1 2 3
A A'
2
1 3
A A'

l Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The
main lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the
azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the
azimuth of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly
adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.
l Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main
lobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at
point 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As
a result, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The
correct method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then,
adjust the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear.
Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal
appears.
When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as
shown in Figure 6-6, a common error is moving the antenna left to right along line DD', or
top to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the
main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2
or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required so that the
three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the
antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 6-5 until the peak signal appears.
Figure 6-6 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E
1
2
D D'
1 2
D D'
1
3
3
E E'
E'
6.2.1.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas

When aligning single-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting
the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.
Prerequisites
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.

l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of
rain, snow, or fog.
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude
and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The Multimeter is calibrated.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

l Adjustable wrench
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter
l North-stabilized indicator
NOTICE
You can adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the appropriate nuts or
screws. For details, see the installation guide for the antennas. Steps provided in this section
are for reference only.
Precautions
l If nonSD configuration is used, align antennas in the following sequence:
a. Power on the RFU-NonSDs at both ends of a channel (RFU Port1 channel is
recommended), and power off the RFU-NonSDs on other channels.
b. Align antennas.
c. Power on the RFU-NonSDs on other channels.
l If SD configuration is used, align antennas in the following sequence:
a. Power on the RFU-SDs at both ends of a channel (RFU Port1 channel is
recommended), and power off the RFU-SDs on other channels.
b. Align the main antennas at both ends.
c. Retain the position of the main antenna at the remote end, and adjust the SD
antenna at the local end.
d. Retain the position of the main antenna at the local end, and adjust the SD antenna
at the remote end.
e. After aligning the antennas, power on the RFU-SDs on other channels.
NOTE
For a dual-channel IF board, turn off the soft power switch of RFUs or mute RFUs instead of powering off
them.

Procedure
Step 1 Calculate the voltage value VBNC for the RSSI port corresponding to the designed receive
power based on the RSSI and received signal level (RSL) curves.
NOTE
The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the RFU.
Step 2 Determine the azimuth of the antenna according to the installation position and height of the
antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.
NOTE
For a special radio link (for example, with one end on the mountain top and the other end at the mountain
foot), inclination between the link and the horizontal line is larger than the half-power angle of the antenna.
You need to first slightly adjust the elevation of the antenna, so that the main lobes are aligned in the vertical
direction.
Step 3 Connect a multimeter to the RSSI port on the RFU at the local end and test the voltage value
VBNC. Turn the multimeter to the DC power level with the voltage value 20 V.
NOTE
It is recommended that you fix the multimeter to the tower with adhesive tapes at a point suitable for
observation, so that you can observe the RSSI voltage value while aligning antennas.
In the non-SD scenario, during antenna alignment, the RSSI cable must connect to a multimeter through
the connector with the label of Main.
In the SD scenario, during alignment of the main antennas, the RSSI cable must connect to a multimeter
through the connector with the label of Main. During the alignment of SD antennas, the RSSI cable must
connect to a multimeter through the connector with the label of SD.
Figure 6-7 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 4 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:

1. Keep the remote antenna fixed.
2. Adjust the azimuth adjustment nut, rotate the antenna widely in the horizontal direction,
and observe the value of VBNC on the multimeter. When the value is not 0, tighten the
azimuth adjustment nut.
3. Adjust the azimuth adjustment nut, rotate the antenna slightly in the horizontal direction,
and observe the peak values of VBNC on the multimeter.
Normally, three signal peaks are tracked, as shown in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8 Signal peaks
NOTICE
When the rotation range is wide enough and the observation of the multimeter is careful,
see6.2.1.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes if less or more than two signal peaks appear.
4. Adjust the azimuth adjustment nut until the azimuth of the antenna is at position 2 in
Figure 6-8. When the antenna is at position 2, the value of VBNC is the peak value.
5. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 until VBNC reaches the peak within
the tracked range.
6. Tighten the antenna at the local end.
NOTE
When you tighten the antenna, ensure that the VBNC voltage remains at the peak value.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When the VBNC reaches the
peak value, tighten the antenna at the remote end.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When the VBNC at the local end and the VBNC
at the remote end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends.
NOTE
l The adjustments are slight.

l After the adjustments, the VBNC must reach or exceed the VBNC value obtained in Step 1 after antennas at
both ends are tightened.
----End
6.2.1.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas

When aligning dual-polarized antennas, engineers need to align the main lobe by adjusting the
azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. Engineers also need to adjust the feed
booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets the specified
requirements.

Prerequisites
l The site commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link is complete.
l The weather at both stations is suitable for outdoor operations and there is no threat of
rain, snow, or fog
l On-site conditions meet the requirements for the antennas to operate at a high altitude
and the personnel commissioning the antennas are trained to work at high altitudes.
l The Multimeter is calibrated.
l The ATPC function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).
l The AM function is disabled (its default status on the NE is Disabled).

l Adjustable wrench
l Telescope
l Interphone
l Hex key
l Multimeter
l North-stabilized indicator
l Spanner delivered with the OMT
Context
NOTE
For a dual-channel IF board, turn off the soft power switch of RFUs or mute RFUs instead of powering off
them.
In this topic, ODUs at both ends are installed separately from antennas. If ODUs at both ends need to be
installed directly on antennas, the action of adjusting the feed boom needs to be changed to the action of
adjusting the OMT.
When aligning antennas, use RSLs measured by a multimeter to calculate XPD values. After NEs run
properly, you can query XPD values on the NMS to check link status.
Procedure
Step 1 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and power on the
horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
horizontally polarized signals.
Step 2 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to
6.2.1.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the
horizontally polarized signals is aligned with the antenna.
Step 3 Measure the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.
1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally
polarized ODUs.
2. Calculate the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the
curve diagram delivered along with the ODUs.
Step 4 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized
signals reaches the lower threshold (P2).

1. Power on the vertically polarized ODUs at the local end.

2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized
ODUs.
3. Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve
diagram in the ODUs box.
4. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).
NOTE
– 24 dB is obtained through a rollback from the antenna XPD specification 30 dB by 6 dB.

– In actual commissioning, the XPD value is usually greater than 24 dB. Try to adjust the XPD value
to the maximum value to ensure that links work in the optimal state.
If... Then...
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is less than 24 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) is not less than 24 Perform Step 5.
dB
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2)
should not be less than 24 dB.
Step 5 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.
Step 6 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUsat both ends of the radio link, and power on the
vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link. Ensure that the antennas transmit
vertically polarized signals.
Step 7 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step
3.
Step 8 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the horizontally polarized
signals reaches the lower threshold (P4).
1. Power on the horizontally polarized ODUs at the local end.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally
polarized ODUs.
3. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the horizontally polarized signals by referring to the curve
diagram delivered along with the ODUs.
4. Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).
NOTE
– 24 dB is obtained through a rollback from the antenna XPD specification 30 dB by 6 dB.

– In actual commissioning, the XPD value is usually greater than 24 dB. Try to adjust the XPD value
to the maximum value to ensure that links work in the optimal state.
If... Then...
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is less than 24 dB Proceed to the next step.
The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) is not less than 24 Perform Step 9.
dB
5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly until
the signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4)
should not be less than 24 dB.

Step 9 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.
Step 10 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 are
not less than 24 dB.
NOTE
l If D1 and D2 are the same, you do not need to adjust the feed boom.
l 24 dB is obtained through a rollback from the antenna XPD specification 30 dB by 6 dB.
l In actual commissioning, the XPD value is usually greater than 24 dB. Try to adjust the XPD value to the
maximum value to ensure that links work in the optimal state.
Step 11 Tighten all the screws on the antennas.

NOTE
Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI again to ensure that no fault occurred in the
process of tightening the screws.
----End
Related Information
In practice, you can align dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the vertically polarized
signals.
6.2.2 Checking the RF Installation and Commissioning Quality

You can check for intermodulation and leakage faults due to improper RF installation by
querying the RFU receive power in different networking scenarios.
Prerequisites
l Antennas have been aligned.
l Basic data has been configured for all NEs on the network.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.
Tools, Instruments, and Materials

Web LCT

Flow for Checking the RF Installation and Commissioning Quality

Check for interference Check for intermodulation and leakage Diagnose intermodulation and leakage
Mute all the opposite-end RFUs.

Mute all the opposite-end
Start Unmute the local-end RFU with an RSL
RFUs; unmute all the local-
larger than -90 dBm.
end RFUs
Mute the other local-end RFUs.
Mute all the local- and

opposite-end RFUs Check whether the RSL of the faulty RFU is
larger than -90 dBm
Check the RSL values of all
the local-end RFUs
Check the RSL values of all
the local- and opposite-end
RSL>-90 dBm?
RFUs Leakage Interm
Check for RFU Check for wavegu
No intermodulation
No Yes installation faults faults
Intermodulation
Yes No RSL>-90 dBm?
or leakage
RSL>-90 dBm?
or leakage
interference
Interference
No Reinstall the
Reinstall the RFU waveguide
Check and clear Check for the Further diagnose

the interference intermodulation End intermodulation or End
source and leakage leakage
NOTE
Set the RFU transmit status and query the RSL value. For details, see Configuring a Hop of Radio Link.
Procedure
Step 1 Check for interference.
1. Mute the local-end and opposite-end RFUs.
2. Check the local-end and opposite-end RSL values. If the RSL values are larger than -90
dBm, interference exists; if not, no interference exists.
3. If no interference exists, check for intermodulation or leakage.
Step 2 Check for intermodulation or leakage.
1. Mute all the opposite-end RFUs and unmute all local-end RFUs.
2. Check the RSL values of all the local-end RFUs. If any RSL value is larger than -90
dBm, intermodulation or leakage exists; if not, no intermodulation or leakage exists.
3. If no intermodulation or leakage exists, end the check.
4. If intermodulation or leakage exists, further diagnose the intermodulation or leakage.
Step 3 Diagnose the intermodulation or leakage.
1. Mute all opposite-end RFUs, unmute the faulty RFU with an RSL larger than -90 dBm,
and mute the other local-end RFUs.
2. Check the RSL of the local faulty RFU. If the RSL is not larger than -90 dBm,
intermodulation exists; if it is larger than -90 dBm, leakage exists.
3. If intermodulation exists, check whether the parts installation between the branch
outgoing interface and the antenna incoming interface is proper and whether foreign
objects such as copper scraps exist in the flexible waveguide interface or inner the
waveguide. If the installation is improper or there are foreign objects, reinstall the
waveguide.
4. If leakage exists, check whether the RFU is improperly installed and check for slight
damages to the branch waveguide interface. If the RFU installation is improper or if the
RFU or branch waveguide interface has slight damages, reinstall the RFU.

5. Repeat Step 3.1 to Step 3.4 to troubleshoot all RFU faults until all faults are rectified.
----End
6.2.3 Performing an SD Combination Hold-Off Compensation

Test
Perform an SD combination hold-off compensation test to ensure normal SD combination
function.
Prerequisites
l Antennas have been aligned.
l Basic data has been configured for all NEs on the network.
l You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Web LCT
Context
After an RFU is powered on, perform an SD combination hold-off compensation test. If the
Branching unit, RFU, elliptic waveguide, or flexible waveguide is replaced after the SD
combination hold-off compensation test, perform another SD combination hold-off
compensation test.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a desired RFU-SD logical board (power off the RFU-SDs on other
channels) from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Hold-Off Compensation Test
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Start.
After the test is complete, the Prompt dialog box is displayed. Click the link in the dialog box
to enter the abnormal event browsing window in which you can view the test result. In normal
cases, the test result is success.

----End

RFU User Manual 7 Configuration
7 Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes instructions and examples for configuring a multi-channel microwave
system containing ISM6 boards and RFUs.
7.1 Basic Concepts

This section provides links to concepts related to configuring longhaul microwave links.
7.2 Configuration Process
The process of configuring a longhaul microwave link is similar to that of configuring a
shorthaul microwave link.
7.3 Configuration Example (N+0 Links)
This example assumes that the network topology has been configured.

7.1 Basic Concepts

This section provides links to concepts related to configuring longhaul microwave links.
7.1.1 Channel Configuration

OptiX RTN 980L supports three channel configuration modes: adjacent channel alternate
polarization (ACAP), adjacent channel co-polarized (ACCP), and co-channel dual
polarization (CCDP).
OptiX RTN 980L supports the three channel configuration modes at 28/40/56 MHz regardless
of the modulation scheme.
Figure 7-1 ACAP

Adjacent Channel Alternative-Polarization (ACAP)
V polarization
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 Frequency
H polarization
Figure 7-2 ACCP

Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization(ACCP)
V polarization
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Frequency
H polarization

Figure 7-3 CCDP

Co-Channel Dual Polarized (CCDP)
V polarization
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 Frequency
H polarization
7.1.2 SD Combination
Space diversity (SD) combination is a typical protection mode for longhaul microwave links.
path fading.
Definition
SD combination combines two channels of signals from two spatially separated antennas that
receive the same radio frequency (RF) signals into one channel of signals, to substantially
reduce impact of multi-path fading. SD combination takes advantage of the fact that fading on
different paths is different because the multi-path effects are different.
On OptiX RTN 950A, two channels of received signals are combined by the IF combiner of
an RFU-SD, so SD combination is also called SD IF combination.
Purpose
SD combination is generally used for long-distance radio links with serious multi-fading, for
example, radio links over lakes or the sea with serious water surface reflection. If the receive
power of the main and diversity antennas is about the same, using SD combination can
improve the system gain by about 2.5 dB.
As shown in Figure 7-4, the RFU-SD provides two RF receivers to receive RF signals from
the main and diversity antennas. After the two channels of RF signals are down-converted
into IF signals by the RF receivers, the IF combiner combines the signals into one channel of
IF signals. Because the main antenna and diversity antenna are spatially separated, correlation
the two channels of IF signals is low. That is, generally, multi-path fading does not occur on
both channels at the same time, so the positions of notches are different in the two channels of
signals. After combination, the notch depth is decreased to a level that does not affect
services.

Figure 7-4 SD combination
7.2 Configuration Process

The process of configuring a longhaul microwave link is similar to that of configuring a
shorthaul microwave link.
The following figure shows the process of configuring longhaul microwave links.

Figure 7-5 Configuration flowchart (longhaul microwave links)
Start
Modify the IF service type.
Configure a hop of
microwave link.
Create N+1 protection

group.
Configure link
aggregation over air
interfaces.
Create a microwave link

by using the search
method.
Configure the other

information for the
microwave link.
Required
End
Optional
NOTE
The configuration process does not cover microwave links with 1+1 FD protection. For more details, see
Configuring Microwave Features.
Operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.
Process of Configuring Microwave Links
Table 7-1 Process of configuring microwave links
Operation Remarks
Changing the IF Service Type Required if the IF service type is not the
default Native STM1+Ethernet.

Operation Remarks
Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link Required.

Working parameters must be set separately
for each microwave link in an N+0/N+1
protection group. For two links with different
polarization directions in one XPIC group,
the parameters can be configured together.
Creating an N+1 Protection Group Required if the microwave links are

configured with N+1 protection.
Configuri Configurin Creating a Required if the PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ function

ng link g PLA/EPLA/ must be used.
aggregatio EPLA/PL EPLA+/Super If PLA/EPLA/EPLA+ is configured for
n over air A (L1 EPLA Group microwave links, load is shared at the
interfaces LAG) physical layer. Utilization of Ethernet
bandwidth is generally the same for each
microwave link.
OptiX RTN 910A, OptiX RTN 905, OptiX
RTN 950A, OptiX RTN 950 using CSHU/
CSHUA boards, and OptiX RTN 980 using
CSHNA boards support EPLA.
Only OptiX RTN 910A, OptiX RTN 950A,
and OptiX RTN 950 using CSHU/CSHUA
boards support EPLA+.
Configurin Creating a Required if the LAG function will be used.

g a (L2) LAG If LAG is configured for the microwave
LAG links, load is shared at the MAC layer.
Utilization of Ethernet bandwidth might be
different between different microwave links.
Setting LAG Optional.

Parameters It is recommended to retain the default value
Auto for Load Sharing Hash Algorithm.
Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Required if microwave links will be created
Search Method on the U2000.
In normal cases, the main topology displays
the previously created microwave links.
NOTE
Skip this step if microwave links have been
created during per-NE commissioning or the
creation of network topology.
Configuring the other Setting ODU Required if SD combination is disabled for

information for the Advanced an RFU-SD.
microwave links Attributes Set Receive End Type according to the
network plan.

Operation Remarks
Setting ODU Main parameters have been set in

Power Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.
Attributes Required if the following parameters must be
modified according to the network plan.
l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm)
l TX High Threshold(dBm)
l TX Low Threshold(dBm)
l RX High Threshold(dBm)
l RX Low Threshold(dBm)
Setting Optional.
Advanced AM If E1 priority is enabled, you can perform this
Attributes operation to change the number of E1s in
intermediate modulation mode.
Configuring Required if error Ethernet frames are not

Ethernet frame discarded.
header Set parameters according to the network plan.
compression
and error frame
discarding over
air interfaces

7.3.1 Networking Diagram

The network contains four unprotected microwave links with the channel configuration mode
of ACCP. AM is enabled for the microwave links.
Configure the microwave links according to the following requirements:
l Set channel configuration mode to ACCP and enable SD for the links.
l Set all links to support 1 Gbit/s Ethernet services, in which high-priority services occupy
200 Mbit/s and low-priority services occupy 800 Mbit/s.
l Enable AM for the links.
l Configure EPLA for the microwave links between NE11 and NE12.
l High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority
services must not be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are
services that do not require transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be
discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The common service priorities are provided in
this table.

Table 7-2 Common service priorities

Service Type Priority
TDM E1s that carry BTS services High
ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that High

carry NodeB services
Some E1s in the IMA E1 group that High

transmits NodeB services (bandwidth of
these E1s is not smaller than high-priority
services.)
The other E1s in the IMA E1 group that Low

transmits NodeB services
Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet High

services
Streaming media, background, and Low

interactive Ethernet services, for
example, Internet services
Figure 7-6 Networking diagram (microwave chain network with microwave links with 4+0
protection)
Figure 7-7 shows the connections of the microwave links. NE12 is used as an example. The
configuration of NE11 is similar.

Figure 7-7 Board configuration to support microwave links with 4+0 protection (ACCP with
SD)
NOTE
7.3.2 Configuration Procedure

Generally, a hop of microwave link has been configured during per-NE commissioning.
Data Preparation
Item Value in This Example Planning Principle
Basic information about the l The channel l To use the SD

microwave links configuration mode is set combination function,
to ACCP for the the RF transceiver type
microwave links which must be RFU-SD and the
occupy four frequency branching unit type must
points. SD is enabled for support diversity receive.
the links. l On microwave networks,
l Table 7-3 provides basic TX high sites and TX
information about the low sites are arranged
microwave links. alternately.

IF and RF information l The four microwave l Ensure that the air

links transmit only interface bandwidth for a
Ethernet services. microwave link in AM
l Table 7-4 and Table 7-5 guaranteed capacity
provides the IF and RF mode is higher than the
information. total bandwidth of high-
priority services, and link
availability meets
availability requirements
of high-priority services.
l Ensure that the air
interface bandwidth in
AM full capacity mode is
higher than the total
bandwidth of all
services, and link
availability meets the
availability requirement
of low-priority services.
l The Hybrid microwave
capacity and the AM
function are available
only if the corresponding
license files are loaded.

EPLA protection EPLA protection is l The IF services

configured in this example. transmitted by the
members in a EPLA
must be of the same type.
l EPLA parameter settings
must be the same at both
receive and transmit
ends.
l When EPLA coexists
with Ethernet protection
like ERPS or LPT,
Ethernet protection
switching can be
triggered when some
members in a EPLA
group are faulty. To
trigger Ethernet
protection switching by
some failed members, set
Minimum Number of
Activated Member
Links based on the
following formula:
Minimum number of
activated member links =
Maximum number of
remaining activated
member links upon the
triggering of protection
switching + 1
Table 7-3 Basic information about the microwave links

Parameter Link 101 Link 102 Link 103 Link 104
Link ID 101 102 103 104
IF board 4-ISM6-1 4-ISM6-2 6-ISM6-1 6-ISM6-2

(NE11) (NE11) (NE11) (NE11)
4-ISM6-1 4-ISM6-2 6-ISM6-1 6-ISM6-2
(NE12) (NE12) (NE12) (NE12)

Table 7-4 IF information

IF service type Hybrid (Native Hybrid (Native Hybrid (Native Hybrid (Native
STM-1+ETH) STM-1+ETH) STM-1+ETH) STM-1+ETH)
Channel Space 28M 28M 28M 28M
AM Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK

scheme in AM
guaranteed
capacity mode
Modulation 1024QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM 1024QAM

scheme in AM
full capacity
mode
E1 priority Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

status
Number of E1s 0 0 0 0
in AM
guaranteed
capacity mode
Number of E1s 0 0 0 0
in AM full
capacity mode
Table 7-5 RF information

Transmit 11199MHz 11127MHz 11155MHz 11211MHz

frequency of a
TX high site
Transmit 10675MHz 10703MHz 10731MHz 10759MHz

frequency of a
TX low site
TX power 26.5 (NE11) 26.5 (NE11) 26.5 (NE11) 26.5 (NE11)

(dBm) 26.5 (NE12) 26.5 (NE12) 26.5 (NE12) 26.5 (NE12)
RX power -10 (NE11) -10 (NE11) -10 (NE11) -10 (NE11)

(dBm) -10 (NE12) -10 (NE12) -10 (NE12) -10 (NE12)
ATPC status Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Procedure
Step 1 Configure a hop of microwave link.
Take link 101 as an example:
Step 2 Configure EPLA protection.

Take NE11 as an example.

1. Create an EPLA group.
NOTE
In this example, an IF board with a smaller slot ID is configured as the active board and an IF board
with a larger slot ID is configured as the standby board. In actual situations, refer to the network plan.
2. Set Minimum Active Links.

Step 3 Create a microwave link by referring to Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method.
----End

7.4.1 Networking Diagram

The network contains six longhaul microwave links (in a 5+1 protection group) with the
channel configuration mode of CCDP. AM is enabled for the microwave links.
Configure the microwave links according to the following requirements:
l Set the channel configuration mode to CCDP for the links.
l Enable AM for the links.
l To improve transmission reliability of important services, channels on the microwave
links between NE11 and NE12 are configured with 5+1 protection.
l Set all links to support 800 Mbit/s Ethernet services and 6xSTM-1 services, in which
high-priority services occupy 100 Mbit/s and low-priority services occupy 700 Mbit/s.
l High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority
services must not be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are
services that do not require transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be
discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The common service priorities are provided in
this table.
Table 7-6 Common service priorities

Service Type Priority
STM-1 services from NodeBs High
Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet High

services
Streaming media, background, and Low

interactive Ethernet services, for
example, Internet services
Figure 7-8 Networking diagram (microwave chain network with microwave links with 5+1
protection)
5+1
NE12 NE11
RTN 950A RTN 950A

Figure 7-9 shows the connections of the microwave links. NE11 is used as an example. The
configuration of NE12 is the same.
Figure 7-9 Board configuration to support microwave links with 5+1 protection (CCDP)
7.4.2 Configuration Procedure

Generally, a hop of microwave link has been configured during per-NE commissioning.
Data Preparation
Basic information about the l The channel l

microwave links configuration mode is set On microwave networks,
to CCDP for the links, so TX high sites and TX low
dual-polarized antennas sites are arranged
must be used and four alternately.
frequency points are
occupied.
l Table 7-7 provides basic
information about the
microwave links.

IF and RF information l Each microwave link l Ensure that the air

transmits one channel of interface bandwidth for a
STM-1 services and microwave link in AM
some Ethernet services. guaranteed capacity
l Table 7-8 and Table 7-9 mode is higher than the
provides the IF and RF total bandwidth of high-
information. priority services, and link
availability meets
availability requirements
of high-priority services.
l Ensure that the air
interface bandwidth in
AM full capacity mode is
higher than the total
bandwidth of all
services, and link
availability meets the
availability requirement
of low-priority services.
l When the E1 priority
function is enabled, full
E1 service bandwidth ≤
Full service bandwidth -
Guaranteed service
bandwidth + Guaranteed
E1 service bandwidth.
l The Hybrid microwave
capacity and the AM
function are available
only if the corresponding
license files are loaded.
N+1 protection N+1 protection is The IF service modes,

configured in this example. number of TDM services,
Port 2 on the ISM6 board in channel spacings, and
slot 2 provides a protection modulation schemes for
channel. members in an N+1
protection group must be
consistently configured.
Table 7-7 Basic information about the microwave links

Parameter Value (NE11 and NE12)
Link ID-V 101 102 103

Parameter Value (NE11 and NE12)
Board in the vertical 2-ISM6-2 4-ISM6-2 6-ISM6-2

polarization
direction
Link ID-H 201 202 203
Board in the 2-ISM6-1 4-ISM6-1 6-ISM6-1

horizontal
polarization
direction
Table 7-8 IF information

Parameter Link 101 and 201 Link 102 and 202 Link 103 and 203
IF service type Hybrid (Native Hybrid (Native Hybrid (Native

STM-1+ETH) STM-1+ETH) STM-1+ETH)
Channel spacing 28M 28M 28M
Modulation scheme 128QAM 128QAM 128QAM

in AM guaranteed
capacity mode
Modulation scheme 512QAM 512QAM 512QAM

in AM full capacity
mode
Number of STM-1 1 1 1
services
Table 7-9 RF information

Transmit frequency 11449 11477 11495

of a TX high site
(receive frequency
of a TX low site)
Transmit frequency 10919 10947 10975

of a TX low site
(receive frequency
of a TX high site)
TX power (dBm) 26.5 (NE11) 26.5 (NE11) 26.5 (NE11)

26.5 (NE12) 26.5 (NE12) 26.5 (NE12)

RX power (dBm) -46 (NE11) -46 (NE11) -46 (NE11)

-46 (NE12) -46 (NE12) -46 (NE12)
ATPC status Disabled Disabled Disabled
Procedure
Step 1 Configure a hop of microwave link.
Take port 1 on the ISM6 board in slot 4 of NE11 as an example:


Step 2 Configure enhanced N+1 protection.

Take NE11 as an example.
Step 3 Create a microwave link by referring to Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method.
On the network, the eight microwave links have been created in Configuring Network
Topology and this step is skipped.
----End

RFU User Manual 8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
About This Chapter
This document provides operation guides to the maintenance and alarm handling related to the
RFU.
8.1 Part Replacement

Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation
varies according to the specific part type.
8.2 Alarm Reference
This chapter describes all the possible alarms on the RFU and how to handle these alarms.

8.1 Part Replacement

Part replacement is a method frequently used to locate faults. The replacement operation
varies according to the specific part type.
8.1.1 Replacing an RFU/ODU

When an RFU/ODU is replaced, the unprotected services on the RFU/ODU are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of RFU/ODU replacement.
l You must know the specific positions of the RFU/ODU to be replaced and the IF board
connected to the RFU/ODU.
l The spare RFU/ODU must be at hand, whose type must be the same as the type of the
RFU/ODU to be replaced.

l Ejector lever (torque wrench)
l U2000
l Silicon
l Waterproof adhesive tape
Precautions
CAUTION
l Before replacing an RFU/ODU, power off the RFU/ODU.
l Considering live-line working and radiation risks, it is advised to power off RFUs/ODUs
on adjacent channels before replacing an RFU/ODU installed on a hybrid coupler.
NOTICE
l Replacing an RFU/ODU installed on a branching unit or hybrid coupler may temporarily
affect services on other channels. It is advised to mute the peer RFU/ODU to minimize the
impact.
l Do not damage the coating when you replace an RFU/ODU. In the case of any coating
damage, repair the coating timely.

Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms on the RFU/ODU and then record the results.
Step 2 Perform the following steps according to the IF board types.
If... Then...
The RFU/ODU to be replaced connects Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF
to a single-channel IF board board.
NOTICE
To turn off the ODU-PWR switch, pull the switch
lever outwards slightly and set the switch to the "O"
position.
The ODU to be replaced connects to a Turn off the soft power switch of the RFU/
dual-channel IF board ODU.
Step 3 Remove the IF cable and the PGND cable from the RFU/ODU.
Step 4 Remove the RFU/ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU Loosen the four latches of the ODU and
with a waveguide interface disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the
hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
You need to remove the RTN 600 ODU Remove the ODU from the post.
with a coaxial interface
You need to remove the RTN XMC ODU Loosen the captive screws on the ODU and
disconnect the ODU from the antenna, the
hybrid coupler, or ODU adapter.
You need to dismount the RFU l Split LH: loosen the captive screws on the
RFU, and remove the RFU from the BU.
l Integrated LH: loosen the captive screws
on the L-shaped adapter and remove the
adapter (including the RFU) from the
subrack.
Step 5 Ensure the type of the spare RFU/ODU is the same as the type of the RFU/ODU to be
replaced.
Step 6 Install the RFU/ODU.
Option Description
If... Then...
You need to install a new RTN 600 See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide.
ODU with a waveguide interface
You need to install a new RTN 600 See the RTN 600 ODU Quick Installation Guide.
ODU with a coaxial interface

Option Description
You need to install a new RTN XMC See the RTN XMC ODU Installation Guide.
ODU
You need to install the RFU l Split LH: see the OptiX RTN 980L Quick
Installation Guide (Split, Outdoor).
l Integrated LH: see the OptiX RTN 980L Quick
Installation Guide (Integrated).
Step 7 Connect the PGND cable and the IF cable to the RFU/ODU.
Step 8 Waterproof the IF interface on the RFU/ODU.
If... Then...
The RFU/ODU to be replaced connects Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front
to a single-channel IF board panel of the IF board.
NOTICE
To turn on the ODU-PWR switch, pull the switch
lever outwards slightly and set the switch to the "I"
position.
The ODU to be replaced connects to a Turn on the soft power switch of the RFU/
dual-channel IF board ODU.
Step 10 After the RFU/ODU starts to work, check the LINK indicator and ODU indicator on the IF
board.
The ODU indicator and LINK indicator should be on and green.
Step 11 Query the current alarms of the RFU/ODU. There should be no new alarms on the RFU/
ODU.
----End
8.1.2 Replacing an IF Board

When an IF board is replaced, unprotected services on the board are interrupted.
Prerequisites
l You must know the impact of board replacement.
l You must know the specific position of the board to be replaced.
l You must know the service protection and protection channels of the board to be
replaced.
l The spare board must be available, and the version and type of the spare board must be
the same as the version and type of the board to be replaced. You can query the board
manufacturing information to obtain the version of the board to be replaced.

l ESD wrist strap

l Screwdriver
l U2000
Precautions
IF boards support hot swap. After a substitute board is installed, it enters the initialization
state and starts working two minutes later.
If an IF port carries an MPLS tunnel and dynamic ARP is disabled on the peer NE of the
MPLS tunnel, you need to change the static ARP table entries of the peer NE.
NOTICE
To replace a dual-channel IF board, turn off the soft power switch of the connected ODU
before removing an IF cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the current alarms of the board.
Step 2 Optional: If the services on the board are configured with SNCP, ensure that the services are
already switched to the protection channel.
1. Query the SNCP protection group.
2. If the port on the board functions as the current working channel, the current protection
channel is not on the board, perform the forced switching.
Step 3 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with 1+1 protection, switch the
service to the protection IF board.
1. Query the IF 1+1 protection group.
2. If the board functions as the current working board, perform the forced switching.
Step 4 Optional: If the services on the radio link are configured with N+1 protection, ensure that the
services are already switched to the protection IF board.
1. Query the IF N+1 protection group.
Step 5 Optional: If the services are configured with MPLS APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection tunnel.
1. Querying MPLS APS Status.
Step 6 Optional: If the services are configured with PW APS, ensure that the services are already
switched to the protection PW.
1. Querying PW APS Status.
Step 7 Optional: If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Muting/Unmuting an
ODU and mute the ODU at the opposite end.

If... Then...
A single-channel IF board needs to be Turn off the ODU-PWR switch on the IF
replaced board.
NOTICE
To turn off the ODU-PWR switch, pull the switch
lever outwards slightly and set the switch to the "O"
position.
A dual-channel IF board needs to be Turn off the soft power switch of the RFU/
replaced ODU.
Step 9 Remove the board.
Step 10 Check and verify that the version and type of the spare board are the same as the version and
type of the board to be replaced.
Step 11 Ensure that the ODU-PWR switch on the front panel of the spare IF board is turned off.
NOTE
Skip this step when replacing a dual-channel IF board (ISM6).
Step 12 Insert the board.
Step 13 After the board starts to work, check the indicators on the board. The STAT indicator should
be on and green.
If... Then...
A single-channel IF board needs to be Turn on the ODU-PWR switch on the front
replaced panel of the IF board.
NOTICE
To turn on the ODU-PWR switch, pull the switch
lever outwards slightly and set the switch to the "I"
position.
A dual-channel IF board needs to be Turn on the soft power switch of the RFU/
replaced ODU.
Step 15 Query the current alarms of the board.

There should be no new alarms on the board.
Step 16 Optional: If the forced switching has been performed for the services, release the forced
switching.
Step 17 Optional: If the forced protection switching has been performed for the radio link, release the
forced switching.
Step 18 If the IF board is configured with the XPIC function, see Muting/Unmuting an ODU and
unmute the RFU/ODU at the opposite end.
----End

8.2 Alarm Reference

This chapter describes all the possible alarms on the RFU and how to handle these alarms.
8.2.1 Alarm List

The following table lists all the possible alarms generated by the RFU.
8.2.1.1 RFU
l BD_STATUS l LOOP_ALM l RADIO_RSL_BEYO l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l CONFIG_NOSUPPO l POWER_ALM NDTH l TEMP_ALARM
RT l RADIO_FADING_M l RADIO_RSL_HIGH l WRG_BD_TYPE
l HARD_BAD ARGIN_INSUFF l RADIO_RSL_LOW
l IF_INPWR_ABN l RADIO_MUTE l RADIO_TSL_HIGH
8.2.1.2 RFUSD
l BD_STATUS l POWER_ALM l RADIO_RSL_LOW l TEMP_ALARM
l CONFIG_NOSUPPO l RADIO_FADING_M l RADIO_TSL_HIGH l WRG_BD_TYPE
RT ARGIN_INSUFF l RADIO_TSL_LOW
l HARD_BAD l RADIO_MUTE l RFUSD_DELAY_UN
l IF_INPWR_ABN l RADIO_RSL_BEYO EQUAL
l LOOP_ALM NDTH
l RADIO_RSL_HIGH
8.2.2 Alarms and Handling Procedures

This chapter describes all the alarms on the RFU in alphabetical order and how to handle
these alarms.
8.2.2.1 RFUSD_DELAY_UNEQUAL
Description
The RFUSD_DELAY_UNEQUAL alarm indicates that the delay of main and diversity
signals is inconsistent.
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type
Critical Equipment alarm

Parameters
None
Impact on the System

When this alarm occurs, links on air interfaces contain bit errors or services on the links are
unavailable.
Possible Causes
l Cause 1: Delay compensation is disabled.
l Cause 2: Difference between the heights of main and diversity antennas is too large.
l Cause 3: The RFU-SD hardware is faulty.
Procedure
Step 1 Cause 1: Delay compensation is disabled.
1. Check whether delay compensation is enabled. If no, enable the function.
Step 2 Cause 2: Difference between the heights of main and diversity antennas is too large.
1. Check whether heights of the antennas complies with the network plan. If no, adjust the
antenna height.
Step 3 Cause 3: The RFU-SD hardware is faulty.

1. Replace the RFU-SD.
----End
Related Information
None
8.2.2.2 RFUSD_SINGLE_RX
Description
The RFUSD_SINGLE_RX alarm indicates that an RFU-SD can receive signals from only one
direction (main or standby).
Attribute
Alarm Severity Alarm Type

Minor Equipment alarm
Parameters
None

Impact on the System

When this alarm occurs, the IF combination function is invalid.
Possible Causes
Cause: The IF combination mode is set to Main or Standby.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the IF combination mode to IF Combination.
----End
Related Information
None


RTN 950A V100R008C10 RFU User Manual 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RTN 950A V100R008C10 RFU User Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX 950A Radio Transmission System

RFU User Manual

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

3.3.5 Availability.............................................................................................................................................................. 123

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

3.6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................. 164

4 Safety Precautions..................................................................................................................... 205

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

4.1.1 General Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................................206

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

7.4 Configuration Example (N+1 Links)..........................................................................................................................264

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

About This Chapter

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Figure 1-1 OptiX RTN 950A multi-channel microwave system

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Table 1-1 Basic information about the IDU 950A

Number of radio directions 1 to 6

RF configuration mode l N+0 non-protection (N ≤ 6)

Service interface type l E1 interface

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950A

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3

Table 1-2 RFU supported by the OptiX RTN 950A

Series type XMC-LH

Frequency band L6/U6/7/8/11 GHz

Channel spacing 28/40/56 MHz (U6/8/11 GHz)

Figure 1-3 Appearance of an RFU

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4

Figure 1-4 Appearance of a BU (in the case of the BU-SD)

1.2 RF System Configuration

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5

4+0/3+1 (single polarization)

Figure 1-5 4+0/3+1 (single polarization) configuration

6+0/5+1 (single polarization)

Figure 1-6 6+0/5+1 (single polarization) configuration

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6

6+0/5+1 (dual polarization)

Figure 1-7 6+0/5+1 (dual polarization) configuration

6+0/5+1 (dual polarization, SD)

Figure 1-8 6+0/5+1 (dual polarization, SD) configuration

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7

1.3.1 Air Interface Capacity

Service capacity in SDH microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)

28 (27.5) 128QAM STM-1

56 (55) 128QAM 2 x STM-1

Service capacity in integrated IP microwave mode (LH ACCP mode)

28 QPSK Strong 15 35 to 44 35 to 54 35 to 76 36 to 107

28 16QAM 33 70 to 89 71 to 109 72 to 154 73 to 217

28 16QAM 38 82 to 104 83 to 128 84 to 180 86 to 253

28 32QAM 49 105 to 134 106 to 163 108 to 231 110 to 324

28 64QAM 59 126 to 160 127 to 196 129 to 277 131 to 389

Issue 01 (2016-3-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8

Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

40 QPSK Strong 23 50 to 64 51 to 78 51 to 110 52 to 155

40 QPSK 27 59 to 75 60 to 92 60 to 130 62 to 183

40 16QAM 48 102 to 129 103 to 158 104 to 223 106 to 313

40 16QAM 56 119 to 151 120 to 185 122 to 261 124 to 367

56 QPSK Strong 33 72 to 92 73 to 112 74 to 158 75 to 223

56 QPSK 39 85 to 107 85 to 131 86 to 185 88 to 260